Download MASTER SPECIFICATIONS Division 26

MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
Division 26 - ELECTRICAL
Release 2.0 R2
Oct 2015
Released by:
Cleveland Clinic
Facilities and Construction
9500 Euclid Ave.
Cleveland OH 44195
All information within this Document is considered CONFIDENTIAL and PROPRIETARY. By
receipt and use of this Document, the recipient agrees not to divulge any of the information herein
and attached hereto to persons other than those within the recipients’ organization that have
specific need to know for the purposes of reviewing and referencing this information. Recipient
also agrees not to use this information in any manner detrimental to the interests of Cleveland
Clinic.
Cleveland Clinic
Master Specifications
Copyright © 2015
By the Cleveland Clinic
These Specifications, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without
the permission of the Cleveland Clinic.
Cleveland Clinic
Master Specifications
Copyright © 2015
By the Cleveland Clinic
These Specifications, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form
without the permission of the Cleveland Clinic.

Cleveland Clinic Master Specifications: Division 26 - Electrical
This document contains the Master Specifications for the design and construction of new
and renovated facilities for all domestic Cleveland Clinic locations. It is be used by A/E
firms in the preparation of Construction Documents for all facility types.
The general purpose of each Specification is to provide minimum criteria for construction
materials at Cleveland Clinic facilities regarding Code and FM Global compliance,
warranty, approved products, execution and uniformity.
The Specifications are used to prepare specific project Contract Specifications. They are
intended to be used to address system design aspects of equipment that Cleveland Clinic
desires to standardize among facilities, and identify prohibited materials and construction
practices. Use of these Specifications will help A/E’s meet the Cleveland Clinic’s
primary goal of providing a safe, reliable, and energy efficient installations and ultimately
successful patient outcomes.
The use of these Specifications is mandatory for all design or maintenance projects.
Deviations are discouraged. If project conditions arise which require a deviation, it
should be thoroughly documented by the user and submitted to the Cleveland Clinic for
review and approval using the Design Standards Revision Request document.
Additionally, all Cleveland Clinic staff, architects, engineers, and contractors are
encouraged to participate in the ongoing development of these guidelines by
communicating any suggestions by use of the Revision Request document.
USER NOTE: throughout the specifications, bracketed, bold text indicates optional
requirements which may be deleted if project conditions permit.
*****


MASTER SPECIFICATIONS: DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
SECTION #
260500
260513
260519
260523
260526
260529
260533
260543
260544
260548
260553
260573
260573.1
260913
260923
260933
260936
260943
261116
261200
261300
262011
262200
262300
262313
262413
262416
262417
262419
262500
262600
262713
262726
262813
262816
262913
263213
263323
263353
263533
263600
264113
264313
265100
265600
TITLE
____________________________
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
ELECTRICAL STUDIES
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
ISOLATED POWER CENTER
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PARALLELING LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
SWITCHBOARDS
PANELBOARDS
ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
ELECTRICITY METERING
WIRING DEVICES
FUSES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
ENGINE GENERATORS
CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEMS
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
TRANSFER SWITCHES
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
** End of List **
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
It is intended this facility obtain a minimum LEED Silver rating. LEED criteria will be followed
for the installation of building systems. This Contractor shall be responsible for the following
items to ensure the Facility achieves LEED certification:
1.
SS credit 8 – Light Pollution Reduction.
2.
EA prerequisite 2 – Minimum Energy Performance.
3.
EA credit 1 – Optimize Energy Performance.
4.
MR credit 2 – Construction Waste Management.
5.
IEQ credit 4.1 – Low Emitting Materials: Adhesives and Sealants
6.
IEQ credit 4.2 – Low Emitting Materials: Paints and Coatings.
7.
IEQ credit 6.1 – Controllability of Systems: Lighting.
B.
Section Includes:
1.
Common electrical installation requirements.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
N/A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
N/A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
B.
Comply with NECA, NFPA, and OSHA requirements.
C.
All work shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner in accordance with ANSI/NECA 1 –
[2011].
D.
All materials and equipment provided under this contract shall be new (except where otherwise
noted) and shall be listed, labeled or certified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
E.
All equipment of the same type and capacity shall be by the same manufacturer.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
F.
Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular
number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as
are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
G.
During construction the contractor shall at all times maintain electrical utilities of the building
without interruption. Should it be necessary to interrupt any electrical service or utility, the
contractor shall secure permission in writing from the Cleveland Clinic for such interruption at
least seven days in advance. Any interruption shall be made with minimum amount of
inconvenience to the Cleveland Clinic and any shut-down time shall have to be on a premium
time basis and such time to be included in the contractor's bid. Arrange to provide and pay for
temporary power source if required by project conditions.
H.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounted items.
I.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
J.
Working clearance around equipment shall not be less than that specified in the N.E.C. for all
voltages specified.
K.
The locations of switches, receptacles, lights, motors, etc. outlets shown are approximate. The
contractor shall use good judgment in placing the preceding items to eliminate all interference
with ducts, piping, etc. The contractor shall check all door swings so that light switches are not
located behind doors. Relocate switches as required, with approval from the Design
Professional.
L.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
Normal maintenance shall not require the removal of protective guards from adjacent
equipment. Install equipment as close as practical to the locations shown on the Drawings.
1. Where the Cleveland Clinic determines that the Contractor has installed equipment
not conveniently accessible for operations and maintenance, the equipment shall be
removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the Cleveland Clinic.
2. “Conveniently Accessible’ is defined as being capable of being reached without use
of ladders, or without climbing or crawling over or under obstacles such as motors,
pumps, belt guards, transformers, racks, piping, ductwork, raceways or similar.
M.
Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
N.
Owner furnished equipment: Equipment furnished by the Cleveland Clinic shall be received,
stored, uncrated, protected, and installed by the Contractor with all appurtenances required to
place the equipment in operation, ready for use. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
equipment as if he had purchased the equipment himself.
END OF SECTION 260500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes medium voltage shielded power cables, sizes 1/0 through 2000 kcmil,
related splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage electrical distribution systems,
5 kV through 35 kV.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: National Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each size and type of cable indicated.
B.
Samples: 16-inch (400-mm) lengths of each type of cable indicated.
C.
Include data sheets for the following additional items:
1.
Splices and terminations.
2.
Separable connectors.
3.
Cable accessories.
4.
Pulling compounds.
5.
Strand dynamometer.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Resumes of cable splicer(s).
B.
Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers.
C.
Cable pulling tension calculations and recorded values.
D.
Source quality-control test reports.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to
install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable. Cable splicer shall have a minimum of 2000
hours experience with terminating and installing medium voltage cable. Furnish satisfactory
proof of such experience for each employee who splices or terminates the cables. Persons listed
by the Contractor may be required to perform a dummy or practice splice and termination in the
presence of the Cleveland Clinic representative or Engineer before being approved as a
qualified installer of medium-voltage cables.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with ASTM B3 and B8.
F.
Comply with UL requirements.
G.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.7
Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single
PROJECT CONDITIONS [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED]
A.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by the Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cables:
a.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
b.
Okonite Company (The).
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
c.
2.
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Southwire Company.
Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:
a.
Raychem Corp.; Tyco International Ltd.
b.
Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold.
c.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
CABLES
A.
Cable Type: Single conductor [Three conductor (AIA only)], UL type MV105 approved for
N.E.C. applications.
B.
Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS 8, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC74, and ICEA S-97-682.
C.
Conductor: Annealed, soft drawn Copper.
D.
Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.
E.
Conductor Insulation: discharge free, no lead, Ethylene-Propylene Rubber (EPR), color
contrasted with strand and insulation shields.
1.
2.
Voltage Rating: [5] [8] [15] [25] [35] kV.
Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level.
F.
Strand Shielding: Black extruded semi-conducting thermoset copolymer applied directly over
the conductor.
G.
Insulation Shield: Black extruded semiconducting thermoset copolymer applied directly over
the insulation.
H.
Shielding: [Copper tape, 5 mils thick, helically applied with 25% overlap, over
semiconducting insulation shield,] or [six solid copper corrugated drain wires embedded
longitudinally in composite layers of semi conducting thermoset copolymer and CPE].
I.
[Cable Armor: Aluminum Interlocked Armor (AIA) applied over cable with overall PVC
jacket] [ FOR CABLE TRAY/TUNNEL INSTALLATIONS ]
1.
Listings: cables shall be UL listed “For CT Use”.
2.
Jacket shall be color coded for voltage identification.
J.
Cable Jacket: Chlorinated Polyethylene, CPE per ICEA and UL 1072.
K.
Identification: The following minimum legend shall be printed on the jacket and repeated at not
more than two foot intervals.
1.
Manufacturer/plant no.
2.
Conductor size (awg or kcmil).
3.
CU.
4.
EPR.
5.
SHLD.
6.
Voltage (kV).
7.
Insulation level (133%).
8.
Insulation thickness (mils), MV-105.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SPLICE KITS
A.
Connectors and Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing
kit manufacturer for the application.
B.
Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes,
ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete
splice, with detailed instructions.
1.
Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer
heat-shrink jacket.
2.
Pre-molded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit.
2.4
SOLID TERMINATIONS
A.
Multi-conductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of
cable and installation conditions, including orientation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class
is equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Compound-filled, cast-metal body, metal-clad cable terminator for metal-clad cable with
external plastic jacket.
Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated
conductors.
Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase- and ground-conductor re-jacketing tubes, cableend sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot.
Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple,
molded-silicone rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type
connector.
Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer
non-tracking tubes; multiple, molded, non-tracking skirt modules; and compression-type
connector.
Class 2 Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, non-tracking insulator tube,
shield ground strap, and compression-type connector. Include silicone-rubber tape, coldshrink-rubber sleeve, or heat-shrink plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of insulation
whether or not supplied with kits.
Medium voltage cable terminations and splices: long barrel, 2-hole hydraulic crimp lugs.
SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS
A.
Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable
terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable
voltage and for sealing against moisture.
B.
Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables
and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
C.
Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A load make/break and continuouscurrent rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being
terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.
D.
Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating;
designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation diameter,
conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body
that is capacitance coupled.
E.
Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary
terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal
units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between
terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands, stainlesssteel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire.
Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for
removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction.
Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective caps,
test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying case.
Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on
accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated
isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator.
F.
Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, and carrying case.
G.
Ground Bails: Heavy duty grounding bails shall be provided to accommodate portable
grounding equipment.
2.6
ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS
A.
Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: Scotch 88, 10-mil- (250-micrometer-) thick, corrosionprotective, moisture-resistant, PVC pipe-wrapping tape.
B.
Arc-Proofing Tape: Scotch 77, fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, and intumescent to 0.3
inch (8 mm) thick, compatible with cable jacket.
C.
Self-fusing Silicon Tape: Scotch 70, high temperature, arc and track resistant tape composed of
self-fusing, inorganic silicone rubber.
D.
Glass-Cloth Tape: Scotch 69, Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide.
2.7
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.
B.
Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a
test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa).
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Minimum cable size shall be #1/0 awg.
B.
Install cables according to IEEE 576.
C.
Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and
sidewall pressure values for single or multi-conductor cables.
1.
A strand dynamometer/tension meter shall be used during the cable installation, readings
shall be recorded and a report submitted for each cable pull.
2.
Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
3.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips that
will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to
cable.
4.
Provide cable lengths with liberal allowances of slack for terminations.
5.
Cable ends shall be moisture proofed at all times until terminations are installed.
D.
Install exposed cables in tunnels in suitable cable trays, cables shall be secured with UL listed
tie wrap materials.
E.
Install underground cables in Sch. 40 PVC conduits in concrete encased ductbanks, comply
with Section 260543.
F.
In buildings and at road crossings, install cables in Rigid Galvanized Conduit (Heavy-wall).
G.
Provide an insulated, stranded copper ground conductor in each conduit with phase conductors.
H.
Medium voltage cables shall not be direct buried.
I.
Install permanent markers at ends of cable runs, changes in direction, and splices.
J.
Install "buried-cable" detectable, warning tape above ductbanks. Comply with Sections 260543
and 260553.
K.
Outdoor splices and terminations shall be performed in dry conditions only.
L.
In manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls
by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables with suitable UL listed non-metallic
racks, located at intervals adequate to prevent sag.
M.
Pull all cables in continuous lengths, splices shall be avoided unless necessitated by the length
of the run. Locations of all splices shall be approved by the Facilities Engineering representative
in writing.
N.
Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:
1.
Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder
is indicated to be connected.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
O.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Three.
Standoff Insulator: Three.
Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not
protected by conduit, cable tray, or termination materials such as transformers, switchgear, and
manholes. In addition to arc-proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc
proofing as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean cable sheath.
Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil (250-micrometer) pipe-wrapping tape.
Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty.
Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable.
Band arc-proofing tape with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide bands of half-lapped, adhesive,
glass-cloth tape 2 inches (50 mm) O.C.
P.
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland
Clinic Fire Protection Group.
1.
All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied
unless an approved “ILSM” is in place for each location.
2.
Products: Specified Technologies, Inc.
Q.
Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.
Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings,
and hardware.
R.
Identify cables according to Division 26 Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
Identify individual phases at termination points.
2.
In manholes, cables shall be identified where cables enter and leave the manhole. Identify
circuit number and voltage.
3.
Use embossed brass tags tie wrapped to cable.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
B.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
After installing medium-voltage cables and terminations but before electrical circuitry
has been connected to busses or switchgear and energized, test for compliance with
requirements, including but not limited to DC high potential testing according to IEEE
400 and insulation resistance testing.
Remove and replace non-compliant cable or terminations and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260513
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260513 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 27 Sections for cabling used for voice and data circuits.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with ASTM.
C.
Comply with UL 44, 83, and 486.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with NFPA 99.
F.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
G.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Include data sheets for the following additional items:
1.
Splices and terminations.
2.
Pulling compounds.
3.
Cable accessories.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 – 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
1.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Field quality-control test reports.
PROJECT CONDITIONS [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED]
A.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by the Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
General Cable Corporation.
2.
Okonite.
3.
Southwire Company.
B.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
1.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN, XHHW-2 and
SO.
1.
D.
2.2
Aluminum conductors shall not be used under any circumstances.
Voltage rating: 600 Volts for 480/277V and 208/120V.
Multi-conductor Cable type MC and AC: Use of MC or medical grade AC cable is not
permitted under any circumstances unless specifically approved in writing by the Senior
Director of Facilities.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Burndy, Thomas & Betts.
2.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
4.
Ilsco.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 – 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
1.
Aboveground Circuits (No. 10 AWG and smaller):
a.
Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable pressure cable type, rated 600 V, 90˚ C,
with integral insulation, approved for copper conductors.
b.
The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires.
c.
The number, size, and combination of conductors, as listed on the manufacturer's
packaging, shall be strictly followed.
2.
Aboveground Circuits (No. 8 AWG and larger):
a.
Cable termination lugs shall be made of high conductivity and corrosion-resistant
material, electro-tin plated, listed for use with copper conductors only, rated for
600 V. Lugs shall be color coded by size.
b.
Cable termination lugs shall be indent type, long barrel with chamfered entry, 2 –
hole, compression type for 250 kcmil and above, 1 – hole for less than 250 kcmil.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Soft annealed Copper stranded, class B compressed.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 16 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 14 AWG and
larger.
C.
Minimum Wire Size: #12 awg for power and lighting circuits, #14 awg for control circuits. In
the case of “homeruns” over 125 feet in length, no conductor smaller than a No. 10 wire shall be
used. The tap conductor from the J-box in the ceiling to the receptacle may be No. 12. Each
120-volt phase conductor shall have a neutral conductor of the same size. The sizing of all wire
except remote control wire shall be accomplished in the case of both feeder and branch circuits
by conforming to the following provisions. Only lighting circuits may share grounding
conductors. All lighting circuits with shared grounding conductors shall be #10 AWG
minimum.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A.
Service Entrance: Type XHHW, or type THHN/THWN up to and including 600 kcmil.
B.
Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW for #2 awg and larger, or type THHN/THWN for all sizes up to
and including 600 kcmil, single conductors in raceway.
C.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW for #2 awg
and larger, or type THHN/THWN for all sizes up to and including 600 kcmil, single conductors
in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 – 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
D.
Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and underground: Type XHHW for #2
awg and larger, or type THHN/THWN for all sizes up to and including 600 kcmil, single
conductors in raceway.
E.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway.
F.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
G.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions for Isolated Power Panel (IPP)
Systems in Operating Rooms, ICU or CCU: Type XHHW or XHHW-2, low leakage, with a
dielectric constant of 3.5 or less, single conductors in raceway.
H.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
I.
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, and strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
J.
Recessed or Semi-recessed Lighting Fixture Whips: Type THHN-THWN (90 deg C), single
conductors in FMC in lengths not to exceed six (6) feet.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Splices in feeder circuits shall be avoided unless necessitated by the length of the run. Locations
of all splices shall be approved by the Office of Facilities.
B.
Conductors may be run parallel from sizes 250 kcmil up to and including 600 kcmil provided all
paralleled conductors are of the same size, manufacturer, length and type of insulation.
C.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E.
Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
F.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems" for secondary service, feeders and branch circuits.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 – 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.6
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland
Clinic Fire Protection Group.
1.
All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied
unless an approved “ILSM” is in place for each location.
2.
Products: Specified Technologies, Inc.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical
equipment and services for compliance with requirements.
a.
2.
C.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Generator, UPS, Isolated Power Panel, Fire Pump.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace non-compliant cables or wires and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 – 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
See Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Telecommunications Cabling requirements.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Low-voltage control cabling.
2.
Control-circuit conductors.
3.
Identification products.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment used for remote-control and
signaling power-limited circuits.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Source quality-control reports.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260523 - 1
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
B.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PATHWAYS
A.
Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
1.
2.2
Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and
2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.
LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A.
Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
PVC insulation.
Unshielded.
PVC jacket.
Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
Unshielded.
Plastic jacket.
Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with
UL 83.
B.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with
UL 83.
C.
Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits:
complying with UL 83.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF,
260523 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
for installation of conduits and wireways.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
General Requirements for Cabling:
1.
Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and panels.
2.
Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support open cables at intervals not exceeding 30
inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, and
terminals.
3.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
4.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat
lamps shall not be used for heating.
C.
Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:
1.
3.3
Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
3.4
Remove abandoned conductors and cables.
CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A.
Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG.
Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.
Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260523 - 3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.5
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.6
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland
Clinic Fire Protection Group.
1.
All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied
unless an approved “ILSM” is in place for each location.
2.
Products: Specified Technologies, Inc.
GROUNDING
A.
3.7
For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Perform continuity tests and checks.
B.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 260523
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
260523 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Electronic equipment, voice and data systems grounding
requirements.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
B.
Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:
1.
Underground distribution grounding.
2.
Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features
specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.5
Test wells.
Ground rods.
Ground rings.
Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells, ground
rings, and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B.
a.
b.
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within
specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values
do not.
Include recommended testing intervals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Comply with NFPA 99.
E.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
F.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V with green colored
insulation, UL 44 or UL 83 listed, unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100
mm) in cross section, provided with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of
connectors to be used. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
switchboards, 600 V, Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. Provide clear Lexan cover over
connections.
2.2
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at
least two bolts.
1.
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solder-less compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.3
GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A.
Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors:
minimum.
1.
2.
Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG
Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank as part of
duct-bank installation. Bury detectable warning tape approximately 6 inches (150 mm)
above grounding conductors. Warning tape shall comply with Section 260553.
C.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere
as indicated.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
E.
1.
Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 12 inches (300
mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Underground Connections: Exothermic welded connectors except at test wells and as
otherwise indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic welded connectors.
GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B.
Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole
floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If
necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinnedcopper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall.
Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive
insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150
mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.
C.
Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,
cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,
hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and
fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written
instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
D.
Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the
pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinnedcopper conductor not less than No. 2/0 for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding
terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 12 inches (300 mm) from the foundation.
3.3
UTILITY GROUNDING
A.
3.4
Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company’s metering equipment in accordance with
Utility Company’s requirements.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Conduit shall not be used as the ground conductor.
In Healthcare facilities, metallic conduit may be used as the additional means of
grounding where the raceway system qualifies as a grounding conductor in accordance
with NEC 250.118.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored cable runs.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment
grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and
power-distribution units.
X-Ray/Imaging Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in
circuits supplying x-ray/imaging equipment.
C.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
D.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Anti-frost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Special Grounding: For patient care area electrical power system grounding, conform to NFPA
99 and N.E.C.
H.
Panelboard Bonding in Patient Care Areas: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the
normal and essential branch circuit panel boards serving the same individual patient vicinity
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
shall be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor not less than No. 10
AWG installed in rigid metal conduit.
I.
Cable trays shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with N.E.C. requirements and
Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.
J.
Raised floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components.
K.
Signal, Data, and Communication Equipment: Comply with requirements in Cleveland Clinic
ITD Standards.
L.
Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate
insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with
branch-circuit conductors.
M.
Outdoor metallic fences around electrical equipment shall be grounded.
3.5
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
1.
Where ground conductors are subject to physical damage, install in raceway.
B.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and
UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system
ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical
service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
C.
Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 12 inches (100 mm) below finished floor or final grade
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Test Wells: Ground rod driven through bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in
Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at
least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
1.
E.
Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush
with finished grade or floor.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
F.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
2.
3.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
G.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
H.
Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.
I.
Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure
ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building.
1.
2.
J.
Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a
minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1.
2.
3.6
Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps
to building steel.
Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.
If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base
of foundation.
Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor
bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid
or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
LABELING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article
for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test
wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors
are connected.
a.
b.
4.
Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
E.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and less: 10 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).
Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products
and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
B.
Steel slotted support systems.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B.
All products shall be UL labeled for their intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200
mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for
use with those items.
Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may
be stainless steel.
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3)
4)
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened
Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Sections for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or singlebolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
D.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
E.
Fire pump feeders that are run exposed shall have conduit supported every five feet from a two
hour rated structure with UL listed components.
3.2
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
3.3
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate[ by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements].
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Sections for site-fabricated metal
supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in
both directions than supported unit and four inches high, and so anchors will be a minimum of
10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. Edges shall be chamfered.
B.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
Concrete materials,
reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Concrete Sections.
C.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.
D.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for raceways and cable trays for Telecommunications cabling.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Surface raceways.
Poke Thru Assemblies.
Trench Duct.
Boxes, floor boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for
exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for pathways for Electronic Safety, Communications and
Security Systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
LEED Submittals:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
C.
1.5
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1:
For solvent cements and adhesive primers,
documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS]
A.
[WHERE
REQUIRED
BY
PROJECT
[Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their
mounting provisions, include those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
REQUIREMENTS
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.]
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All products shall be UL labeled for their intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with NFPA 99.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1.
2.
B.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
Source quality-control reports.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of all manufacturers are
acceptable provided they have a smooth interior, are UL listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70 for the intended location and application and are electro-galvanized steel (EMT) or
hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out (GRC). Conduit and fittings shall be obtained from
the same manufacturer:
B.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
C.
ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
D.
IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
G.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
H.
Multi-conductor Cable type MC and AC: Use of MC or medical grade AC cable is not
permitted under any circumstances unless specifically approved in writing by the Senior
Director of Facilities. Deleted 8 August 2015.
I.
Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT or “blue tube’) and liquid-tight flexible nonmetallic conduit
(LFNC) are not acceptable for use on any Project.
J.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
3.
K.
Comply with UL 886 and
Material: Steel.
Type: Set Screw – indoors; compression - outdoors.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
Joint Compound for IMC, ARC, or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of all manufacturers are
acceptable provided they are sunlight resistant and UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
and marked for intended location and application. Conduit and fittings shall be obtained from
the same manufacturer.
B.
RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
D.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
2.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be UL listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on
cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
D.
Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete
system.
E.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. Provide dividers as
required to separate systems of different voltages.
1.
C.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
Panduit Corp.
b.
Wiremold / Legrand.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and
manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing
characteristics. Provide dividers as required to separate systems of different voltages.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
Panduit Corp.
Wiremold / Legrand.
MEDICAL GRADE TRENCH DUCT
A.
Trench-type medical grade, under floor raceways used for routing of power, data, and signal
cables in CT, X – Ray, MRI rooms and similar rooms.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corporation; Steel City Division.
3.
Raceway Solutions, Inc.
4.
Walker Systems, Inc.; a Wiremold company.
C.
Trench: Include the following features:
1.
UL listed.
2.
Galvanized steel, 14 gauge factory welded.
3.
Non-Ferrous Metal Raceways for use in MRI scan rooms or similar: Aluminum.
4.
Slab Depth Adjustment: Minimum of minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) to plus 5/8 inch (16 mm)
before and during concrete placement.
5.
Cover Supports: Height adjustable, with leveling screws to rigidly support cover
assembly.
6.
Screed Strip: Extruded aluminum along both edges at proper elevation without requiring
shim material.
7.
Trim Strip: Select to accommodate floor finish material.
8.
Partitions: Arranged to separate channels and isolate wiring of different systems.
9.
Grommeted openings in service raceways.
10. Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant finish, applied after fabrication.
D.
Cover Plates: Removable, steel plates, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with full gasket attached to side
units. Fabricate covers with appropriate depth recess to receive indicated floor finish.
E.
Dimensions: coordinate with Medical Equipment Supplier’s approved site installation drawings.
2.7
POKE THRU ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold Company (The).
Poke-Thru Assemblies:
1.
Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service
outlet assembly.
2.
Poke-thru box fittings shall maintain a minimum two-hour fire rating.
3.
Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.
4.
Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with services indicated.
5.
Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor
thickness.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.8
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Adalet.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
FSR Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Material: Sheet metal, 11 gauge.
Type: Flush. Cover with 0.25”square aluminum flange rated for carpet/tile installations.
Provide pour pan accessory for on grade installations.
Shape: Rectangular.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled UL 514A.
Manufacturers: FSR FL-500P.
Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular.
1.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
H.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb
(23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg)
shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
I.
Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes 100 cu. in. and smaller: NEMA OS 1.
J.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes:
galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
K.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
L.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
M.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
Key latch to match panelboards.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Exposed Conduit: GRC, IMC, or RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC, EMT, or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried or concrete encased as
indicated.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Feeders over 600 V: GRC.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.
Tunnels: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
D.
Mixing different types of conduits indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.
E.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
EMT: Use setscrew (indoors) or compression (outdoors), steel fittings. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
F.
MRI scan rooms: non-ferrous or non-magnetic raceway, boxes, fittings and hardware. Where
aluminum raceways (ARC) are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in
nonmetallic sleeve.
G.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
H.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
I.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Installation of all new conduits must be minimum 12 inches from ceiling grid except where
approved by Cleveland Clinic.
D.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
E.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for hangers and supports.
F.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
G.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300
mm) of changes in direction.
H.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
I.
Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
J.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum10-foot (3-m) intervals.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all
directions.
Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location. Fittings shall be concrete tight.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
L.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
M.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
N.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated
throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with
locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
O.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
Q.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use
roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
R.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end
of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in
use.
S.
Surface Raceways:
1.
2.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway
section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape
and glue are not acceptable support methods.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Non-metallic surface raceways shall not be installed in patient care areas.
T.
Trench Duct:
1.
Trench duct shall be Aluminum in MRI rooms, galvanized steel in CT and X- Ray rooms.
2.
Coordinate with Medical Equipment Supplier’s approved site installation drawings.
3.
Obtain approval of medical equipment supplier’s field representative prior to purchase
and installation of all materials.
4.
Provide necessary accessories to accommodate medical equipment cabling.
U.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
V.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
2.
3.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
W.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
X.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
2.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25
feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located
where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has
straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).
Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)
temperature change.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature
change.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
(70 deg C) temperature change.
Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)
of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and
contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F
(0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for
metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
5.
Y.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches
(1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to
vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Z.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of FMC for recessed and semi-recessed
luminaires.
Final connections to motors or equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement shall use FMC not exceeding four feet in length.
Short lengths of FMC shall be used for final primary and secondary connections to Low
Voltage transformers (<600V).
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured
to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
AA. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
BB.
Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6-inch separation in non-firerated walls. Provide minimum 24-inch horizontal separation in acoustic-rated walls.
CC.
Boxes shall be secured between two studs. Boxes connected to one stud are not permitted.
DD. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
EE.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
FF.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
GG. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
HH. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways
and Cabling."
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 12
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.5
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Sections and Cleveland
Clinic Fire Protection Group.
1.
All penetrations shall be under constant visual surveillance until firestopping is applied
unless an approved “ILSM” is in place for each location.
2.
Products: Specified Technologies, Inc.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Junction boxes of different systems shall be identified by colors indicated below. Box and cover
shall be colored prior to attaching identification labels.
B.
Provide permanent nameplates for all pull and junction boxes identifying circuits, voltage, and
source.
C.
Raceways and couplers, fittings, J-boxes, enclosures of different systems shall be identified by
color below, at least every ten feet. Do not color complete conduit or raceway systems.
D.
Colors:
1.
Red:
2.
Yellow:
3.
Purple:
4.
Brown:
5.
Orange:
6.
Green:
7.
Blue:
8.
Black:
3.6
System:
Fire Alarm. (color complete raceway)
Critical Branch.
Life Safety.
Emergency Standby
Equipment Emergency Branch.
Normal power.
Communications.
Low Voltage.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 13
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Telecommunications pathway requirements.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct
banks, and in single duct runs.
Handholes and boxes.
Manholes.
DEFINITION
A.
1.4
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components.
Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and
solvent cement.
Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures.
Warning tape.
Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Shop
drawings shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
Reinforcement details.
Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings.
Ladder details.
Grounding details.
Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.
Joint details.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:
Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.
Cover design.
Grounding details.
Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities
and underground structures.
1.
Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion
fittings.
B.
Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes,
as required by ASTM C 858.
C.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
D.
Source quality-control test reports.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All products shall be UL labeled for their intended use.
B.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards, including ITD Standards for Low Voltage
systems pathways.
C.
Comply with ANSI C2.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent
bending, warping, and deforming.
B.
Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS [DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED]
A.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Cleveland Clinic’s written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final
arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.
B.
Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes
with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with
other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations
from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to
manholes and handholes, and as approved by the Cleveland Clinic.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.
B.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer
as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.2
NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of all manufacturers are
acceptable provided they are sunlight resistant and UL listed for the intended installation.
Conduit and fittings shall be provided from the same manufacturer whenever possible.
B.
Duct Accessories:
1.
2.
Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and
sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated
while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.
Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A.
Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Color: Gray.
Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have [open] or [closed]
bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure.
Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.
Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings
or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for
secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger
shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.
Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a
combination of the two.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Armorcast Products Company.
Highline Products
Quazite, Hubbell Power Systems.
PRECAST MANHOLES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Lindsey Concrete Products.
Mack Industries.
Norwalk Concrete Industries.
Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground
Enclosure Application" Article and with interlocking mating sections, complete with
accessories, hardware, and features.
1.
Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of
approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and
horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.
a.
Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of
walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking
of cables on walls.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for
field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.
Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel
reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.
C.
Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm) thick, for future conduit entrance
and sleeve for ground rod.
D.
Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability
properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location
with the ground-water level at grade.
2.5
UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Bilco Company (The).
East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
McKinley Iron Works, Inc.
Neenah Foundry Company.
Pennsylvania Insert Corporation.
Underground Devices, Inc.
Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading
specified for manhole.
1.
Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M,
Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 29 inches (737 mm).
a.
b.
c.
2.
Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV" for duct systems with power wires and cables for
systems operating at 600 V and less.
Legend: "ELECTRIC-HV" for duct systems with medium-voltage cables.
Legend: "SIGNAL" for communications, data, and telephone duct systems.
Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to
those of roof opening.
a.
C.
Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in
paved areas.
Covers shall have locking provisions.
Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints:
Comply with
ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. (60 L) where
packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.
Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
D.
Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch- (50mm-) diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch (25-by-100-mm) bolt.
1.
E.
Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf (180-kN) shear and 60,000-lbf (270-kN) tension.
Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared,
threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2inch (13-mm) ID by 2-3/4 inches (69 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum at
base.
1.
G.
Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch (150-mm), 4000-psi (27.6-MPa) Concrete: 13,000lbf (58-kN) minimum tension.
Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) diameter, hot-dip
galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod.
Exposed triangular opening.
1.
F.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf (53 kN) minimum.
Cable Rack Assembly: Nonmetallic. Components fabricated from nonconductive, fiberglassreinforced polymer.
1.
2.
Stanchions: Nominal 36 inches (900 mm) high by 4 inches (100 mm) wide, with
minimum of 9 holes for arm attachment.
Arms: Arranged for secure, drop-in attachment in horizontal position at any location on
cable stanchions, and capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in
lengths ranging from 3 inches (75 mm) with 450-lb (204-kg) minimum capacity to 20
inches (508 mm) with 250-lb (114-kg) minimum capacity. Top of arm shall be
nominally 4 inches (100 mm) wide, and arm shall have slots along full length for cable
ties.
H.
Duct-Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to
cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of
withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean
surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable
sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.
I.
Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arranged for attachment to roof or wall and floor of manhole. Ladder
and mounting brackets and braces shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel.
J.
Cover Hooks: Heavy duty, designed for lifts 60 lbf (270 N). Two required.
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.
B.
Non-concrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes
for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products
supplied.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify
tests by manufacturer.
Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying
with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION
A.
Minimum conduit/duct size for underground installations shall be one inch.
B.
Ducts for Electrical Cables over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased
duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concreteencased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in direct-buried
duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in direct-buried duct
bank, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC,
NEMA Type EPC-40 PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths, Walks, Driveways and Roadways: RNC, NEMA
Type EPC-40 PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.
H.
A nylon pull cord shall be installed and tied off in each duct, including spares. The nylon pull
cord shall have a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds.
3.2
UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION
A.
Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data
Wiring:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths:
Precast concrete.
AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.
Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,
Non-deliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20;
Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.
Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Non-deliberate
Loading by Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-10, Polymer concrete units,
SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.
Manholes: Precast concrete.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium
Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.
Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load
rating according to AASHTO HB 17.
EARTHWORK
A.
Excavation and Backfill: Comply with earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications, but
do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B.
Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless
otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.
C.
Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore
vegetation and include necessary top-soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging,
and mulching. Comply with plantings Sections in Division 32 Specifications.
D.
Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures
according to appropriate Division 01 Sections.
3.4
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away
from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to
drain in both directions.
1.
Water intrusion into buildings through ducts is not acceptable.
2.
This Contractor shall be fully responsible for corrective action necessary to insure water
infiltration is eliminated.
B.
Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use
manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of [SELECT] [48 inches (1220 mm)]
[12.5 feet (4 m)] [25 feet (7.5 m)], both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in
same plane.
D.
Duct Entrances to Manholes and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced
approximately 10 inches (250 mm) O.C. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately
for other duct sizes.
1.
2.
3.
Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell
without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.
Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in
the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.
Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
E.
Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at
least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the
building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit
transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section
"Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
F.
Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare
ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03MPa) hydrostatic pressure.
G.
Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.
1.
2.
3.
Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming
of ducts, with not less than 5 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth
and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6
inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not
use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around
ducts or duct groups.
Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Concrete
Sections.
Concreting Sequence: Place each run of concrete envelope between manholes or other
terminations in one continuous operation.
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of
ducts as their temperature changes during and after the concrete placement. Use
expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations,
or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.
If more than one concrete placement is necessary, terminate each in a vertical
plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches
(450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.
Placing Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of
concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank
assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in
middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment
unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Red dye shall be added to the top
of the concrete during the placement.
Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth,
road crossings and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming
conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting
and concrete envelope can be placed without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.
Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope
wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 12 inches (300 mm) between
power and signal ducts.
Depth: Depth: Install top of duct bank at 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade,
unless otherwise indicated.
Stub-Ups: Use manufactured PVC elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated for circuit conductors
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
10.
smaller than No. 1/0 AWG and under 600 volts. Extend concrete encasement throughout
the length of the elbow.
Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and
equipment and at building entrances through the floor for all circuit conductors over 600
volts and circuits under 600 volts with conductor size No. 1/0 AWG or larger.
a.
b.
11.
H.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases,
extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of
base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Warning Tape:
Comply with Section 260553. Bury detectable warning tape
approximately 18 inches (450 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks.
Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank.
Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank
width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm)
apart, horizontally.
Direct-Buried Duct Banks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor
temperature.
Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less
than 5 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to
prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to
expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6
inches (150 mm) between tiers.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare
trench bottoms as specified in earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications for
pipes less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.
Install backfill as specified in earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications.
After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work
toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and
contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing
each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches (100 mm) over ducts and
hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength.
Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct
connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified
in earth moving sections in Division 31 Specifications.
Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts for like services and 12
inches (300 mm) between power and signal ducts.
Depth: Install top of duct bank at 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line.
Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
11.
3.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
Warning Tapes:
Comply with Section 260553. Bury detectable warning tape
approximately 18 inches (450 mm) above all duct banks. Align tape parallel to and
within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning
tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches
(450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.
INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES
A.
Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated.
Install unit level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting
ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,
graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same
density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
Elevations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 18 inches (450 mm) below finished grade.
Manhole Frame: In paved areas and traffic-ways, set frames flush with finished grade.
Set other manhole frames 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
Install handholes with bottom below the frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below
grade at Project site> below grade.
Handhole Covers: In paved areas and traffic-ways, set surface flush with finished grade.
Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.
C.
Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage
provisions indicated.
D.
Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.
1.
2.
E.
Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align
with ladder.
Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings to support frame and
cover and to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry
joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.
Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after
concrete has cured at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in
Division 07. After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof
joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days. Joint between manhole and chimney shall
be sealed with a flexible epoxy or EPDM rubber seal.
F.
Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable
arms as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
G.
Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from
cables and other items in manholes.
H.
Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than
3-7/8 inches (98 mm) for manholes and 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts
installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.
I.
Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard" warning sign on the inside surface of each
manhole cover.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A.
Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box
extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as
recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent
undisturbed earth.
C.
Elevation: In paved areas and traffic-ways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished
grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D.
Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below
grade at Project site> below grade.
E.
Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,
as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm
lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve
adequate working clearances in the enclosure.
F.
Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written
instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for
terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
G.
For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and concrete and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with,
enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on
compacted earth.
1.
2.
Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Concrete
Sections with a troweled finish.
Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep).
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 12
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.7
GROUNDING
A.
3.8
Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.9
Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation
of underground ducts and utility structures.
Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for outof-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are
indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and
bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26
Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
CLEANING
A.
Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout
ducts.
B.
Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
END OF SECTION 260543
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 13
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Comply with Division 07 Sections for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistancerated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating
items.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All products shall be UL labeled for their intended use.
B.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design and Fire Protection Standards.
C.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement
of VOC content.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Wall Sleeves: [Select 1. or 2.]
1.
2.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral water-stop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal
joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and
with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3
mm).
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one
or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5
mm).
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. (Link Seal).
2.
Sealing Elements: [EPDM] [Nitrile] rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of
pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: [Carbon steel] [Composite] [Stainless steel].
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: [Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating,]
[Stainless steel] of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
3.
4.
2.3
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A.
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, water-stop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber water-stop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc. (Link Seal).
GROUT
A.
Description: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5
SILICONE SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1.
2.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
2.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Sections for joint sealants
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;
protect material while curing.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
4.
5.
D.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and
raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed [or unless seismic criteria require
different clearance].
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush
with both surfaces of walls. De-burr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches (75 mm)
above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G.
Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for
installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway
entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or
cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position water-stop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
[WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS, OTHERWISE DELETE THIS SECTION]
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Isolation pads.
Spring isolators.
Restrained spring isolators.
Channel support systems.
Restraint cables.
Hanger rod stiffeners.
Anchorage bushings and washers.
Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used
electrical supports and installation requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The IBC: International Building Code.
B.
ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C.
OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
2.
Site Class as Defined in the IBC: [A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F].
Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: [I] [II] [III].
a.
b.
c.
Component Importance Factor: [1.0] [1.5].
Component Response Modification Factor: [1.5] [2.5] [3.5] [5.0].
Component Amplification Factor: [1.0] [2.5].
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 1
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
4.
1.5
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second) : <Insert
percent>.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: <Insert percent>.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a.
b.
3.
B.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by [an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction].
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
Restrained-Isolation Devices:
loads.
Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined
Delegated-Design Submittal: For [vibration isolation and ]seismic-restraint details indicated
to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and
operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment
mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for
equipment mounted outdoors.
Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and
anchorage devices.
Field-fabricated supports.
Seismic-Restraint Details:
a.
b.
c.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to
the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and
spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and
values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.[ Indicate
association with vibration isolation devices.]
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By [an evaluation service member
of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction], showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for
approval (tests or calculations).
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with
other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.
B.
Qualification Data: For [professional engineer] [and] [testing agency].
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismicrestraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
2.
Kinetics Noise Control.
3.
Mason Industries.
4.
Vibration Isolation.
B.
Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that
match requirements of supported equipment.
1.
Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant [neoprene] [rubber].
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop
restraint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick,
neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Hilti Inc.
3.
Mason Industries.
4.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
5.
Vibration Isolation.
B.
General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application
requirements shall be as defined in reports by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES]
[OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].
1.
C.
Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted
steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;
and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
D.
Restraint Cables: [ASTM A 603 galvanized] [ASTM A 492 stainless]-steel cables with end
connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for
restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: [Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections] [Reinforcing steel angle clamped] to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners
to rods.
F.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.
G.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices.
H.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings:
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
I.
Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for
interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength
required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times
diameter.
J.
Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless
steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as
tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.3
One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment
before shipping.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Powder coating on springs and housings.
All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate
capacity range.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive [vibration isolation and] seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLICATIONS
A.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps
approved for application by [an evaluation service member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].
B.
Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits.
3.3
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment and Hanger Restraints:
1.
2.
3.
Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.
Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by [an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES] [OSHPD] [an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction] providing required submittals for component.
B.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
C.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
D.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A.
3.5
Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways
where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different
structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to
a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Cleveland Clinic, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and
with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
Measure isolator deflection.
Verify snubber minimum clearances.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
D.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION 260548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260548 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Underground-line warning tape.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with NFPA 99.
D.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
E.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
F.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
G.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at more than 600 V:
1.
2.
C.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-(75-mm-)
high letters.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less and conduits larger than two inches:
1.
2.
Black letters on a white field.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
D.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
E.
Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less and conduits larger than
two inches: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter
sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less and conduits two inches and less:
1.
2.2
Factory applied color finish, comply with Section 260533.
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags:
Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.3
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tapes not less than 3 mils (0.08
mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend
label.
C.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
D.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags:
Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.4
FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A.
2.5
2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white
stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A.
Tape:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Color and Printing:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid
aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of
the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription
of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).
Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mils (0.00889 mm).
Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).
3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi
(31.7 MPa).
Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.
Weather-resistant, non-fading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for
application.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
D.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES
(1220 MM)."
Flash Protection Field Marking: All panelboards, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards
motor control centers, motor control panels and electrical control panels shall be provided
with a black on yellow warning sign per ANSI Z535.4 and ISO 3864. The sign shall read:
“DANGER! ARC FLASH and SHOCK HAZARD. FOLLOW ALL REQUIREMENTS
IN NFPA70E FOR SAFE WORK PRACTICES and PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT.” The sign shall be prominently mounted on the front of the equipment
and readily visible. If the equipment has multiple removable front covers, a sign shall be
mounted on each cover. For flush mounted panelboards in finished spaces, the sign shall
be mounted on the inside of the door or inside cover. Manufacturers’ standard labels are
not acceptable.
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs
up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.8
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES
A.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Nameplate: Minimum letter height shall be ½ inch
(13 mm). Refer to Drawings for Nameplate Detail.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
2.9
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Fasteners for nameplates: stainless steel screws that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating
of the enclosure, adhesive labels shall not be used.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
C.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
D.
Attach signs and plastic labels with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and
substrate.
E.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Larger than Two Inches: Each colorcoding band shall completely encircle conduit. Locate bands at changes in direction, at
penetrations of walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and within six
inches of pull or junction boxes.
F.
System Identification Labels for Raceways carrying circuits above 600V: Locate labels at
changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in
straight runs, and within six inches of pull or junction boxes.
G.
System Identification Labels for Raceways carrying circuits 600V and less: Locate labels at
changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 30-foot maximum intervals in
straight runs, and within six inches of pull or junction boxes.
H.
Underground-Line Warning Tape:
During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a
common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 18 inches overall. Comply with Section 260543.
I.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend,
system voltage, and panel/circuit number. System legends shall comply with Section 260533 –
3.5.D.
1.
Normal power.
2.
Critical branch power.
3.
Life safety power.
4.
Equipment branch power.
5.
UPS.
B.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: .For conductors in vaults pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors
listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
b.
Color shall be factory applied.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
c.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
d.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where
splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent
possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
e.
For new work in existing buildings, the existing identification method shall be
used for new conductors provided it meets all requirements of this Section and the
NEC.
C.
Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
D.
Emergency Sources: A sign shall be placed at the service entrance equipment indicating the
type and location of on-site emergency power sources per NEC Art. 700.
E.
Elevator Disconnects: Provide “Fed From” signs indicating the location of the supply side
OCPD for each elevator power source.
F.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
G.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
H.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1.
Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in
raceway.
I.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
J.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Bakedenamel warning signs or Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
Other equipment as indicated on the Drawings.
K.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
L.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at
equipment used for power transfer and load shedding.
M.
Equipment Identification Nameplates: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation
nameplate that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Apply nameplates to Switchgears, Switchboards, Distribution Panels,
Panelboards, Motor Control Centers, Transformers, Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect
Switches, Transfer Switches, Control Panels and Similar Equipment. Systems include power,
lighting, and control systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1.
Colors for equipment nameplates:
a.
NORMAL power system: black letters on white background.
b.
CRITICAL EMERGENCY power system: white letters on red background.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
c.
d.
e.
2.
LIFE SAFETY power system: white letters on red background.
EQUIPMENT EMERGENCY power system: white letters on red background.
STANDBY EMERGENCY power system: (dead bus under normal conditions)
black letters on yellow background.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Identify the piece of equipment, the source, voltage characteristics, and the load
served
b.
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine nameplate. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high
letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
c.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine nameplate. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with one-inch- (26-mm-) high
letters on 3-inch- (76-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 4 inches (100 mm) high.
d.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of nameplates and letters to those
appropriate for viewing from the floor.
e.
Fasten nameplates with appropriate stainless steel screws that do not change the
NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. Stick-on or adhesives are not acceptable
unless the NEMA enclosure rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall
be used to attach nameplates.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes computer-based, fault-current studies, overcurrent protective device
coordination studies, and arc-flash analysis. Protective devices shall be set based on results of
the protective device coordination study.
1.
1.3
Use of Series rated equipment is strictly prohibited
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for
system protective devices has been completed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
Coordination-Study Report.
System One Line Diagram.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
B.
Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software
programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B.
Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible
for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision
and control of engineer.
C.
Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
D.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
E.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
2.2
Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
EDSA Micro Corporation.
2.
ESA Inc.
3.
EZ Power.
4.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 399.
B.
Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include
"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
C.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1.
Optional Features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Arcing faults.
Simultaneous faults.
Explicit negative sequence.
Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
POWER SYSTEM DATA
A.
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1.
2.
3.
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections
and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment
designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams,
overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device
settings.
Impedance of utility service entrance.
Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,
showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, and X/R ratios.
Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
Busway ampacity and impedance.
Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
Generator thermal-damage curve.
Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes RMS symmetrical,
ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment
range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,
instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for
overcurrent relays.
Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating
in amperes RMS symmetrical.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A.
Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes RMS symmetrical at circuitbreaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Utility’s supply termination point.
Incoming Medium-voltage switchgear.
Medium-voltage controllers.
Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
Low voltage switchgear and switchboards.
Motor-control centers.
Distribution panelboards.
Branch circuit panelboard.
Generators and automatic transfer switches.
B.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations
and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
C.
Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.
D.
Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with
IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.
1.
Transformers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
Study Report:
1.
2.
F.
ANSI C57.12.10.
ANSI C57.12.22.
ANSI C57.12.40.
IEEE C57.12.00.
IEEE C57.96.
Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents
on electrical distribution system diagram.
Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on mediumand high-voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent
relays.
Equipment Evaluation Report:
1.
For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
3.4
For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal
to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A.
Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1.
2.
3.
Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.
Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) shortcircuits currents.
Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
B.
Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
C.
Comply with NEC Article 700 requirements for selective coordination of overcurrent protective
devices in the supply side of emergency system.
D.
Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1.
Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Inrush current when first energized.
Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
E.
Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
F.
Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
G.
Coordination-Study Report:
coordination study:
1.
Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a.
Device tag.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods
where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
H.
3.5
Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup
values.
Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
Fuse-current rating and type.
Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
Device tag.
Voltage and current ratio for curves.
Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
No damage, melting, and clearing curves for medium and low voltage fuses.
Cable damage curves.
Transformer inrush points.
Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
Medium voltage equipment relays.
Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A.
Perform analysis using approved computer software program. The worst case operating scenario
shall be the basis for the calculations. Prepare a written report in conjunction with results of
fault-current study.
B.
Submit results in tabular form, include bus/device name, fault current levels, flash protection
boundary distances, PPE classes and AFIE levels.
C.
Provide equipment labels to identify AIFE and appropriate PPE levels.
3.6
COORDINATION OF WORK
A.
The Division 26 Contractor shall be responsible to ensure proper AIC ratings for protection of
electrical equipment. Adjustment of protective device equipment to meet the approved
coordination study submittal shall be the responsibility of the Division 26 Contractor at no
additional cost to the Cleveland Clinic.
END OF SECTION 260573
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
260573 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260573.1 – ELECTRICAL STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes computer-based, electrical studies such as Harmonic studies; Load Flow
studies, Large Motor Starting studies, Power Factor studies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
The final Study/ analysis, in the form of hard copy and electronic media, shall be submitted to
the Cleveland Clinic. The electronic copy shall be demonstrated and validated to the Cleveland
Clinic on Cleveland Clinic computers.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Engineer performing the work.
B.
Product Certificates: For computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B.
Electrical Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer
software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on
electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
Professional Engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible
for the work. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision
and control of engineer.
C.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
ELECTRICAL STUDIES
260573.1 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
2.2
Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available vendors
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited the
following:
1.
EDSA Micro Corporation.
2.
ESA Inc.
3.
EZ Power.
4.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 399.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HARMONIC STUDIES
A.
The harmonics study shall include all indicated portions of the electrical distribution system,
from the normal and alternate sources of power down to each load shown on the one-line
diagram. The harmonics study shall consider operation during normal conditions, alternate
operational configurations, emergency power conditions and any other operations which could
result in harmonic distortion exceeding proscribed standards.
1.
3.2
The study shall include the “worst case” situation that is likely to be produced. The worst
case is defined as that combination of equipment which is deemed most likely to create
the highest level of total harmonic voltage distortion and total current demand distortion
at a given point.
LOAD FLOW STUDIES
A.
Load flow studies shall be performed using computer software to simulate actual steady-state
power system operating conditions, enabling the evaluation of bus voltage profiles, real and
reactive power flow, and losses. The load flow study shall use multiple scenarios to help ensure
that the power system is adequately designed to satisfy the project’s performance criteria.
1.
The study shall determine the following:
a.
Optimizing circuit usage and loading
b.
Develop bus voltage profiles
c.
Minimize kW and kVar losses
d.
Identify transformer tap settings
2.
Provide an Electrical Distribution System Diagram: prepare in hard-copy and electroniccopy formats.
ELECTRICAL STUDIES
260573.1 - 2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
3.3
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram.
LARGE MOTOR STARTING STUDY
A.
3.5
This study is used to calculate the electrical parameters (voltage and current) and the
accelerating torque of the large motors during the starting process. These type of studies would
normally be performed for large electric motors (250 HP and larger). The study shall also
evaluate the effect of reduced voltage on other running motors in the Facility.
POWER FACTOR STUDY
A.
Perform analysis using approved computer software program and power system metering.
B.
A power factor study shall investigate the power factor of the facility over the previous twelve
month billing cycle to examine any penalties incurred by the local utility and to investigate any
possible incentives for higher power factor.
C.
The goals of the study shall include at a minimum:
1.
Reduce total system loading thereby increasing system capacity.
2.
Determine any negative interaction between Non Linear Loads (Harmonic Source) and
capacitor banks.
3.
Determine preferred locations, sizes, types and control of capacitor banks to optimize
system performance, reduce low PF penalties and take incentives from the Utility for
high PF.
3.6
EXECUTION OF WORK
A.
Perform studies using approved computer software programs. Prepare written reports in
conjunction with results of study. Provide completed data sheets and calculations where a part
of the study.
1.
The final Study/ analysis, in the form of hard copy and electronic media, shall be
submitted to the Cleveland Clinic.
2.
The written report shall include the following attributes.
a. Introduction and executive summary sections which include assumptions and
recommendations. Reiterate assumptions stated elsewhere in the report.
b. Body of report including findings and detailed recommendations.
c. Data sheets in tabular form and/or graphical.
d. Copies of all drawings used or generated.
e. Copies of all manufacturers’ data used in the analysis.
END OF SECTION 260573.1
ELECTRICAL STUDIES
260573.1 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260913 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This section describes the metering, communications, and visualization requirements for a
modular, scalable Web-based Electrical Power Monitoring and Control System. The goal of
this system is to provide the user the ability to monitor and manage their power system with the
user only requiring a browser to access the system. This system shall allow the user to directly
connect to the web enabled equipment and to software based system designed to aggregate data
from multiple devices and provide a system level view of both real time information and
advanced power ands system analytics.
1.
B.
Section includes the following for monitoring and control of electrical power system:
1.
C.
Software, remote devices for metering, monitoring, control and protection, a network
time server, all Ethernet communications gateways, interface modules, a server class
computer, software, intercommunication wiring, ancillary equipment, startup and training
services, and ongoing technical support
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
The EPMCS shall comply with new construction installations utilizing web-based
components to function independently or to co-exist with other Eaton Cutler-Hammer
INCOM or Power-Net system components or other Modbus RTU communicating devices
in a heterogeneous environment
Those Sections specifying power distribution components that are monitored or
controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
B.
Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for products (such as switchboards
and switchgear) that describe power monitoring and control features to illustrate
coordination among related equipment and power monitoring and control.
Shop Drawings: For power monitoring and control equipment. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Outline Drawings: Indicate arrangement of components and clearance and access
requirements.
Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section
and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data
communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators,
and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data
communication lines.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and
presentation with a block diagram.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
C.
Other Informational Submittals:
1.
1.5
Manufacturer's system installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record
options and setup decisions.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power monitoring and control units, to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Operating and applications software documentation.
Software licenses.
Software service agreement.
PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all
installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes,
and drivers for all installed hardware.
Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design
guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hardcopy submittal.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Self-study guide describing the process for setting equipment's network address; setting
options; procedures to ensure data access from any PC on the network, using a standard
Web browser; and recommended firewall setup.
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Software Backup: On compact discs or portable memory sticks.
Device address list and the set point of each device and operator option, as set in
applications software.
Graphic file and printout of graphic screens and related icons, with legend.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
C.
Software Upgrade Kit: For Cleveland Clinic use in modifying software to suit future power
system revisions or power monitoring and control revisions.
D.
Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operating and programming digital
and analog devices.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing power monitoring and
control equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control components to
form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.
1.
B.
1.8
Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
Coordinate Work of this Section with those in Sections specifying distribution components that
are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.
SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A.
Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
B.
Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include the operating systems. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following :
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Eaton Corporation Electrical Group, “Power X-pert”.
General Electric Company, GE Consumer & Industrial.
Schneider Electric, Power Management Operations.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
A.
The EPMCS shall provide a web browser-based monitoring and management system for all
communicating devices in the power system.
B.
The EPMCS shall communicate to all devices over an industry standard Ethernet
communication backbone. For devices that cannot communicate directly on Ethernet, a
gateway shall be provided.
C.
The EPCMS shall identify power system anomalies and measure, display, and record trends and
alarms.
D.
The EPCMS shall provide a database for recording of equipment ratings and characteristics
with capability for graphic display on monitors.
E.
The EPCMS shall report equipment status and power system control.
1.
2.3
Display circuit-breaker and switch status and allow circuit-breaker control.
APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE
A.
The software system shall provide a real time, web based visualization system to allow the user
to easily view the key operational characteristics of the system. These features of the system
shall not require any custom screen development to provide the following functions:
1.
The software shall provide the ability to view the current value of all operational
variables available from a device. The user shall be able to organize and view this
attributes in easy to understand groupings.
2.
The software shall not require specific knowledge of a device to be able to display
information from that device. Instead, the software shall have the ability to query the
device for its operational capabilities and automatically set up web based pages to display
the information:
a.
The software shall support the ability to automatically establish a connection to
any device added to a gateway without the user doing any configuration in the
software.
3.
The software shall automatically build a navigation tree of all connected devices so the
user can easily find a device and display the data for that device.
4.
The software shall provide the ability trend one or more variables (volts, amps, kW, kWh,
etc.) from one or more devices on a web based trend graph.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
5.
The software shall support displaying of the waveform data collected by the power
monitoring devices that can capture waveforms. The waveform display shall be fully
accessible via the web browser.
6.
The software shall provide time stamped sequential order of events for trips, analog
alarms, motor start profiles, and operator actions based on the information received from
the actual devices. The software shall support ordering the events based on timestamps
up to 1ms in accuracy.
7.
The software shall have the ability to manage alarm and event conditions detected by the
devices. Alarm management shall include:
a.
Ability to acknowledge and close alarms via the web interface.
b.
Ability to color code alarms and events based on severity and state.
c.
Ability to separate Alarms and Events on separate tabs of the display to reduce
information clutter.
d.
Ability to sort and analyze alarms by time, device and other key characteristics.
e.
Ability to install a small “system tray” applet to provide notification that an alarm
has been raised even if the browser session is not active.
f.
Ability to send an email, page or text message for selected sets or alarm conditions.
B.
The software shall provide a web based editing environment that allows the user to extend the
software visualization capabilities by developing custom animated graphic pages. Examples of
typical pages include one-line diagrams, elevation views and plan layouts.
C.
The software system shall be easy to operate and manage. It shall also be scalable such that the
system can be expanded without requiring the user to reconfigure a new system.
D.
The software system shall be scalable such that the system can be expanded without requiring
the user to reconfigure a new system.
1.
E.
The software shall allow users to be granted privileges based on their user ID and
password, to perform various functions in the system. The software shall support, at a
minimum 2 levels of access with one supporting read only access and the other provide
full Administration access.
The software shall provide a data warehouse based reporting option that allows the user to
analyze long term (years) system performance and operational issues.
1.
2.
The reporting system shall be able to connect to one or more real time systems to provide
the ability to analyze local or enterprise power system performance.
The reporting system shall allow the user to subscribe to a report such that the report is
run with a pre-defined set of selections at a pre-defined time and the output is email to the
user, saved as a file to a directory or sent to a printer. A subscription shall be at to be set
up such that it reoccurs on a regularly scheduled basis.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
4.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
The reporting system shall allow the user to define a reporting hierarchy such that the
report output can provide high level summary information and also support “drill down”
into the key operational information (current, voltage, kWh, etc) for different levels in the
reporting hierarchy.
The reporting system will support a variety of output formats including, but not limited to
interactive web pages, Excel files, pdf files, csv files, and XML files.
F.
Summary Web pages shall be provided to display the following information for each
communicating device within the power equipment lineup:
1.
Circuit Summary Page: Circuit name, three-phase average RMS current, power (kW),
power factor, and breaker status.
2.
Transformer Page: Transformer tag, coil temperatures, and cooling fan status.
3.
Specific Device Pages: Each individual communicating device shall display detailed,
real-time information, as appropriate for device type.
G.
Graphics: Interactive color-graphics platform with pull-down menus and mouse-driven
generation of power system graphics, in formats widely used for such drafting; to include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Site plan.
Floor plans.
Equipment elevations.
Single-line diagrams.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Monitoring and Control System: As the EPMCS is a web enabled system; the computer that
runs the software shall be set up and managed as a server. This server computer will provide
access to the system for any authorized user via a standard internet browser. The computer
shall be placed on the Cleveland Clinic’s data transmission network and configured as a server
that others can access.
B.
The server shall consist of a server class computer with the following specifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
[____] processor with [___] GB RAM, [___] GB hard disk drive.
CD-RW Drive.
Ethernet 10/100 card.
Auto-reboot capability after power failure.
Windows [___] Server or greater.
The end user computers require Internet Explorer v[ ___ ] or greater and Windows [ ___ ]
or higher
C.
All web enabled devices in the EPMCS shall provide any authorized user access to the critical
data listed below with the user requiring only a supported Internet browser on their own
computer.
D.
RMS Real-Time Measurements:
1.
Current: Each phase, neutral, ground, and average of three phases.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Voltage: Line-to-line each phase, line-to-line average of three phases, line-to-neutral
each phase, line-to-neutral average of three phases.
Power: Per phase and three-phase total.
Demand.
Power Factor: Per phase and three-phase total.
Frequency.
THD: Current and voltage.
Harmonics to the 127th level.
E.
Events screen providing:
1.
Latest events.
2.
Enabled Triggers.
3.
Historical Events.
4.
Real time and historical wave form capture with simultaneous display of voltage and
current for all phases.
5.
Real time and historical THD display.
6.
Real time and historical harmonic display.
F.
The web enabled power monitoring hardware shall connect to the power system using Web
enabled gateways that communicate to the power system devices for viewing of power
monitoring and equipment status information over device specific communication links.
G.
Network Configuration: The web-enabled power monitoring hardware and gateways shall
support multiple protocols over Ethernet to ensure the system can easily be integrated into the
EPCMS software system as well as existing systems. These protocols shall includes:
1.
Modbus TCP/IP to support integration into third party systems.
2.
BacNet Web Services to support integration into third party systems.
3.
SNMP to support integration into Data Center management system.
4.
Manufacturer’s standard protocols.
H.
The web enabled gateways shall support the following devices:
1.
[Provide list based on project requirements]
I.
The devices connected to the Web enabled gateway shall communicate using the protocols
described above over a local area network interconnected with twisted pair shielded cable in
raceway, interconnecting all breaker trip units, protective relays, drives, and metering devices
equipped with communications.
J.
All web enabled power monitoring hardware that is connected directly to Ethernet shall support
the ability to synchronize their time clock using NTP. The purpose for this support is to ensure
all device clocks are accurate so that event sequences can be adequately analyzed.
K.
The web enabled power monitoring hardware shall provide support for configuration of all web
enabled meters and gateways directly via the web pages on the device.
1.
To support the configuration of legacy devices on the device networks connected to the
gateway, the gateway shall support a “pass thru mode” to allow the legacy configuration
software to connect from any computer on the users network to the device via the
gateway.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
MICROPROCESSOR BASED METERING EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide microprocessor based power quality meters consisting of a meter base(s) with an
integrally mounted display. Comply with UL 1244.
B.
Basis of Design Products: provide Eaton “Power X-pert Meter Series” products or equal by
General Electric or Square D.
C.
Accuracy:
1.
For meters that are circuit-breaker accessories, metering accuracy at full-scale shall not
be less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
Current: Plus or minus 2.5 percent.
Voltage: Plus or minus 1.5 percent.
Energy, Demand, and Power: Plus or minus 4.0 percent.
D.
Current inputs for each channel shall be from standard instrument current transformers.
E.
Voltage inputs for each channel shall allow for connection into circuits with the following
parameters:
1.
Input range up to 600V L-L, direct connected.
2.
PT primary input of 120 volts to 500,000 volts.
F.
The Metering shall be capable of monitoring, displaying, and communicating true RMS
information. The Metering shall be suitable for installation in single phase, two or three wire
systems or in three phase, three or four wire systems.
1.
AC current in A, B and C phase, 3-phase average, Neutral (N) and Ground (G).
2.
AC voltage for A-B, B-C and C-A, phase average, A-N, B-N and C-N, average phase to
N, and N to G.
3.
Real Power (Watts), Reactive Power (VARS), Apparent Power (VA), for each phase and
system.
4.
Accumulated, Incremental and conditional measurement for Real Energy (WH), Reactive
Energy (VARH), Apparent Energy (VAH) for each phase and system.
5.
Frequency (Hz) Accuracy +/- 0.01 hertz.
6.
Demand values including present, running average, last complete interval and peak for
System Current (Amperes).
7.
Power Factor for both 60-cycle fundamental Watts to VA and Apparent total Watts to
total VARS including harmonics for A, B and C phase and 3 phase average.
8.
Current percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in A, B and C phase and N.
9.
K-Factor (sum of the squares of harmonic currents times the square of their harmonic
numbers).
G.
Meters shall have a digital Input/Output (I/O) card which shall include eight (8) digital inputs
and three (3) relay outputs.
1.
Output Relay Control: Normally open and normally closed contacts, field configured.
H.
Onboard Data Logging:
1.
Store logged data, alarms, events, and waveforms in onboard nonvolatile memory.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
I.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Alarms.
1.
User Options: Define pickup, dropout, and delay.
J.
Display:
1.
Back-lighted LCD to display metered data with touch-screen selecting device.
2.
Capable of being mounted to the Meter base unit or remote mounting of display up to
2000 ft away with capability of displaying up to 16 base units or complete Meters.
K.
The Meter(s) shall be provided with multiple communications ports and shall be permanently
connected to communicate via standard protocols.
2.6
ETHERNET SWITCHES
A.
A single web access point: 4 or 6 ports Ethernet switch shall be provided in the equipment to
allow a single access point for the user and the ability to connect more than one network device
directly on the Cleveland Clinic’s Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN).
B.
Ethernet switch shall support standard copper RJ45 connectors and/or 100BaseFX Fiber-Optic
via ST connectors.
2.7
LAN CABLES
A.
2.8
Comply with Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.
LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CABLING
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Install cables and wiring according to requirements in the Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.
C.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Label each power monitoring and control module with a unique designation.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
GROUNDING
A.
3.4
Comply with Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding of Electrical Systems.”
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Electrical Tests: Use caution when testing devices containing solid-state components.
Continuity tests of circuits.
Operational Tests: Set and operate controls at workstation and at monitored and
controlled devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required by Sections
specifying equipment being monitored and controlled.
Test LANs according to requirements in the Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards.
System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a
period of not less than 10 percent of calculated battery operating time.
Verify accuracy of graphic screens and icons.
Metering Test: Load feeders, measure loads on feeder conductor with an RMS
reading clamp-on ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated current on the same
phase at central-processing workstation. Record and compare values measured at
the two locations. Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percent and record
resolution method and results.
Record metered values, control settings, operations, time intervals, and functional
observations and submit test reports.
C.
Power monitoring and control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
E.
Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest.
requirements are met.
F.
Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested
components indicating test results, date, and responsible party and representative.
G.
Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
H.
Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
Verify that specified
260913 - 10
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
1.
2.
3.6
Train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel in interpreting and using monitoring
displays and in configuring and using software and reports. Include troubleshooting,
servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment. Provide a minimum of 12 hours'
training.
Training Aid: Use approved final versions of software and maintenance manuals as
training aids.
ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
three visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
END OF SECTION 260913
ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL
260913 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Time switches.
Exterior photoelectric sensors.
Indoor occupancy sensors.
Indoor daylight sensors.
Wall box dimmers.
Emergency relay control devices. (GTD)
Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for wire and
cabling.
Section 260933 “Central Dimming Controls” for Architectural Dimming Systems.
Section 260936 “Modular Dimming Controls” for localized dimming.
Section 260943 "Network Lighting Controls” for low-voltage, manual and programmable
lighting control systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
B.
PIR: Passive infrared.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy, photoelectric sensors and emergency
relay control devices.
1.
Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to,
photosensors, time switches, emergency relay control devices and occupancy sensors.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.5
WARRANTIES
A.
1.6
Indoor occupancy sensors, photosensors, time switches and emergency relay control devices
shall have a standard five (5) year warranty.
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including luminaires, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TIME SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Intermatic, Inc.
2.
Cooper Industries, Inc.
3.
TORK.
B.
Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid state programmable units with alphanumeric
display; complying with UL 917.
1.
2.
3.
Contact Configuration: SPST.
Contact Rating: 30A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac.
Program: 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each
day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on
holidays.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
5.
6.
C.
2.2
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a
program on selected channels.
Astronomic Time: All channels.
Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.
Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.
EXTERIOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Lutron.
2.
Leviton.
3.
Hubbell Building Automation.
B.
Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA to operate connected load,
or contactor coils, complying with UL 773A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
Time Delay: 30-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
Lightning Arrestor: Air gap type.
Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base.
INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Lutron Electronics Company.
2.
WattStopper.
3.
SensorSwitch.
B.
General Description: Ceiling or wall mounting, solid-state type with a separate relay unit and
isolated output.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and
off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable in ten (10)
minute increments to a maximum setting of sixty (60) minutes.
Self-Adaptive: Continually adjusts sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal lighting
control for any use of the space.
Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc,
150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
Isolated Relay: Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open,
Normally Closed, and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and
other control options where indicated.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
6.
Mounting:
a.
b.
c.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C.
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical
enclosure.
Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
Bypass Switch: Override the ‘on’ function in case of sensor failure.
Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when
selected lighting level is present.
Sensors shall be UL listed.
Communications capability with daylighting function.
Five year warranty.
Fully compatible with lighting control system/dimming system and shall communicate
with said system.
Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.
Dual-Technology Low Voltage Type: Ceiling or wall mounting; detect occupancy/vacancy by
using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular
technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in
the field by operating controls on unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of
a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of
average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical
manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.
Dual Technology Sensing: Passive infrared and ultrasonic sensing coupled with
technology for sensing very fine motions. Signal processing technology detects finemotion passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic signals without the need to change the
sensor's sensitivity threshold
Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Detection Coverage (Standard Room): 360º coverage, detect
occupancy anywhere in the following areas when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling.
a.
Up to 1000 sq. ft. for normal range.
b.
Up to 2000 sq. ft. for extended range.
Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing
areas.
Wall-Mounted Sensors: Detection Coverage (Standard Room): 180º coverage, detect
occupancy anywhere in the following areas when mounted on wall.
a. Up to 1600 sq. ft. for utilizing dual technology.
Operating Environment: Operating temperature 32º-104ºF with a relative humidity (noncondensing) of 0% to 95%.
Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.4
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Power Packs for Wired Sensors
A.
120-277 VAC power input/24 VDC, 150 mA power output; 16 A lighting (120-177 V), 1 HP
motor (120-277 V) relay contact rating; Lutron Model PP-DV or equal.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor (automatic-on and
automatic-off), an occupancy sensor with low light feature (automatic-on when less than one
footcandle of ambient light available and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and
automatic-off).
C.
Wall-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor (automatic-on and
automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off).
2.5
INDOOR DAYLIGHT SENSORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Lutron Electronics Company.
2.
WattStopper.
3.
SensorSwitch.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Daylight Sensor: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit with photodiode element
to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye, sensing daylight and electrical
lighting levels. The unit adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Sensor Output: Provide data to the dimming ballast or step dimming ballast for adjusting
light levels. As daylight increases, the lights are reduced.
Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, and Class 2 power source as defined
by NFPA 70.
Open loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.
Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent luminaire
lighting and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
Time Delay: Adjustable in ten (10) minute increments to a maximum setting of sixty
(60) minutes.
Low voltage class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.
Indicator: LED’s to indicate operation and programming mode.
Sensor shall be capable of being mounted in ceiling tile or luminaire.
Sensor shall have the ability to be replaced without reprogramming.
UL listed.
Five year warranty.
Fully compatible with lighting control system/dimming system and shall communicate
with said system.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.6
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A.
Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,
with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Lutron “Maestro” series or equal.
B.
Control: Continuously adjustable slide-to-off with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply
with UL 1472.
C.
Dimmers shall be fully compatible with the lighting control system/dimming system and shall
communicate with said system.
D.
Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.
2.7
EMERGENCY RELAY CONTROL DEVICE
A.
Internal Type: Self contained, modular, emergency power transfer device, factory mounted or
field mounted within luminaire body and compatible with LED driver, as manufactured by The
Bodine Company, Model GTD or approved equal by Cleveland Clinic.
1.
Emergency Connection: Operate one (1) LED luminaire continuously under emergency
conditions regardless of wall switch position. Connect unswitched normal and
emergency circuits, and switched normal circuit to transfer device. Output to one (1)
LED luminaire.
2.
Fused input.
3.
Rated for 3 amps, 120/277 volts.
B.
External Type: Where control of multiple luminaires is indicated, externally mounted type unit
as manufactured by The Bodine Company, GTD20 or approved equal by Cleveland Clinic.
1.
Fused input.
2.
Rated for 20 amps, 120/277 volts.
C.
All devices shall be warranted for five (5) full years after date of purchase.
D.
UL 924 Listed.
2.8
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B.
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Class 1 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than
No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including luminaires, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
B.
Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
Allow six (6) feet of cable slack for sensor location adjustment.
C.
Dimmers:
1.
2.
3.2
Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch.
B.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1.
Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B.
Label time switches with a unique designation.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 7
FOR: DRAFT
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
B.
3.5
After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time
delays.
Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective Work.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two
visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements
for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section
"Network Lighting Controls."
END OF SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES_2015
260923 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260933 -CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
PART 1
1.1
– GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Section, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 265100 “Interior Lighting” for LED drivers controlled by Central Dimming
Control System.
2.
Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for occupancy sensors used in
conjunction with Central Dimming Control System.
3.
Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for wiring and
cabling.
Section 260523 “Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables” for low voltage control
cabling.
4.
1.3
Central Dimming Control Systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Central Dimming Control System: Factory assembled dimming and switching panels,
interfaces and modules. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces and sensors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation detail for Central Dimming Controls.
1.
Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring.
2.
Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to,
power interfaces, wall stations, lighting control modules, low voltage control
interfaces, switching modules and sensors.
3.
Shall include catalog cut sheets with performance specifications including historical
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
testing data demonstrating complete compliance to all of the Specifications herein.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Field quality control test reports.
E. Shall include a load schedule which indicates the actual connected load and load type per
circuit, circuits and their respective control zones, circuits that are on emergency, and the
capacity, phase, and corresponding circuit numbers per the Electrical Drawings.
F. Shall include a complete schematic of the System.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of Central Dimming Control
Systems.
B. Central Dimming Control System shall be UL Listed specifically for the required loads.
Manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance on request.
C. Manufacturer shall have their quality system registered to the ISO 9001 Quality Standard,
including in-house engineering for all product design activities. Due to the exclusion of the
Design Control element, ISO 9002 Registration is not acceptable.
D. Central Dimming Control System shall meet IEC801-2, tested to withstand a 15kV
electrostatic discharge without damage or loss of memory.
E. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive
equipment:
1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F).
2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
3. Dimming Control System must be protected from dust during installation.
1.7
WARRANTY
A. Central Dimming Controls shall have minimum standard five (5) year warranty.
1.8
COMMISSIONING
A. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper System
installation and operation under following parameters:
1. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:
a. Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.
2. Make a visit upon completion of installation of Central Dimming Control System:
a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.9
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Verify connection and location of controls.
Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.
Check dimming panel load types and currents and remove by-pass jumpers.
Verify System operation control by control, circuit by circuit.
Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
Obtain sign-off on System functions.
Cleveland Clinic to be trained on System operation.
MAINTENANCE
A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to
the Cleveland Clinic 24 hours a day seven days a week.
B. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of ten years from date of manufacture.
C. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Lutron.
2. CCF approved equal (must be approved in writing by CCF Facilities Engineering)
B.
The Contractor shall use only Central Dimming Control System software and hardware by
the listed manufacturer which meets the requirement and intent of this Specification.
C.
Substitutions:
1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for
approval by Cleveland Clinic a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and
must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a
review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.
2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Cleveland Clinic or Engineer at
Contractor's expense.
3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated
costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete
engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original
design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to
rough-in.
GENERAL
A. Provide System hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single
manufacturer.
B. Central Dimming Controls: Ten-year operational life while operating continually at any
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
2.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
temperature in an ambient temperature range of 0° C (32°F) to 40° C (104°F) and 90 percent
non-condensing relative humidity.
Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000 V without
impairmentper IEC 801-2.
DIMMING / RELAY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrolytic capacitors to operate at least 20° C below the component manufacturer's
maximum temperature rating when device is under fully-loaded conditions in 40° C (104° F)
ambient temperature.
B. Load Handling Thyristors (SCRs and triacs), Field Effect Transistors (FETs), and Isolated
Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs): Manufacturer’s maximum current rating minimum two
times control’s rated operating current.
C. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times operating current without
impacting lifetime of dimmer/relay.
D. Design and test dimmers/relays to withstand line-side surges without impairment to
performance.
1. Panels: Withstand surges without impairment of performance when subjected to surges
of 6,000 volts, 3,000 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and per IEC 61000-4-5 surge
requirements.
2. Other power handling devices: Withstand surges without impairment of performance
when subjected to surges of 6,000 volts, 200 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects “off” at any control to disconnect the load
from line supply.
F. Possess power failure memory such that if power is interrupted and subsequently returned,
lights will automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or off) prior to power
interruption within 3 seconds.
G. Dimmers:
1. Multiple dimmer/module types to specifically control LED drivers, 0-10v loads and
non-dim loads.
2. Each dimmer to be assigned a load type that will provide a proper dimming curve for
the specific light source.
3. Possess ability to have load types assigned per circuit, configured in field.
4. Minimum and maximum light levels user adjustable on circuit-by-circuit basis.
5. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manor. Dimmers with visible steps
are not acceptable.
6. Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line voltage variations
including changes in RMS voltage (a minimum of plus or minus 2 percent change in
RMS voltage/cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency/second),
dynamic harmonics, and line noise.
7. Each dimmer to incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that
smoothly ramps lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
8. Line Voltage Dimmers; Meet following load-specific requirements:
a. Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) transformer: Dimmer to operate electronic low
voltage transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase
E.
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
control dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has
recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.
9. Low Voltage Dimming Modules; Meet following requirements:
a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay:
Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.
b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light
sources:
1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
b) Sink current via IEC 60929.
c) Source current.
2) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.
3) DSI digital communication.
4) DALI broadcast communication IEC 60929:
a) Logarithmic intensity values in compliance with IEC 60929.
b) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.
5) PWM IEC 60929.
H. Non-dim circuits to meet the following requirements:
1. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
2. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to load circuits.
3. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
2.4
POWER PANELS
A. Product:
1. Lutron - GP Series.
B.
C.
Mechanical:
1. Delivered and installed as a factory assembled panel.
2. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without need to remove dimmer assemblies
or other components.
3. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
4. Ship panels with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper
inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and
be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of
connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
Electrical:
1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a
dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Branch circuit breakers/miniature circuit breaker (MCB) meet following performance
requirements:
a. Utilize type C trip curve for lighting loads.
b. Rated at 6,000 AIC.
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
c.
Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature
protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to
have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient
temperature is above rating of panel.
d. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other
components in panel.
D. Lutron GP Series Grafik Panel:
1. Utilize universal 16A (non-CE) or 10A (CE) continuous-use dimmer.
2. Limit current rise time to minimum 190 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load
current waveform and minimum 285 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load
current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.
Current rise to be minimum 220 µsec as measured from 10-90 percent of load current
waveform and minimum 325 µsec as measured from 0-100 percent of load current
waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.
3. Load faults only affect the given circuit.
4. Tested 100 percent for proper operation at three stages:
a. Function test each printed circuit board.
b. Function test fully assembled panel.
c. Final assembly burn in for two hours at 40° C (104° F) ambient temperature.
E. Lutron LP/CCP Series Light Duty Commercial Lighting Control Panel:
1. Flush into wall or surface mounted as Project permits.
2. Utilize multiple load type continuous-use dimming/switching modules.
3. For switching only circuits, utilize 1,000,000 cycle relay.
F. Lutron XP Softswitch Series Switching Panels:
1. Flush into wall or surface mounted as Project permits.
2. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
3. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to load circuits.
4. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
G. Lutron Circuit Selector:
1. Provide following capabilities:
a. Operate circuits directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and provide
feedback of System operation.
b. Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in Dimming System.
c. Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting levels.
2. Where indicated on Drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit to be
capable of transferring control based on independent programming between
architectural control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512 1990
or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.
H. Diagnostics and Service:
1. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of System or processor.
2. Dimmers/relays: Include diagnostic LED’s to verify proper operation and assist in
System troubleshooting.
3. Dimming/relay panels: Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
failure that minimizes loss of control for occupant.
a. If Lighting Control System fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel processor
provides local control of lights until System is repaired.
b. If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can be
used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of lights
until panel processor is repaired.
c. If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each dimmer
to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching
operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
2.5
POWER INTERFACES
A. Product: SELECT [PHPM-PA, PHPM-3F, PHPM-SW, NGRX-PB, GRX-FDBI, GRXPWM & GRX-TVI].
B. Electrical:
1. Phase independent of control input.
2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 20
C. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of
system or processor.
2.6
LOW-VOLTAGE WALL STATIONS
A. Product: Architectural.
B. Electronics:
1. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication.
C. Functionality:
1. Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.
2. LEDs to reflect the true System status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button
press was properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not
processed.
3. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
4. Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.
D. Color:
1. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the Architect.
E. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
F. Engrave wall stations in English with appropriate button, zone, and scene engraving
descriptions furnished prior to fabrication.
G. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:
1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
2. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
3. Incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver.
4. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
H. Slider Controls:
1. When controlled by slider wall station, light level to be indicated by position of slider.
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
More than one zone may be proportionately raised or lowered at same time.
2.7
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES
A. Contact Closure Interfaces:
a. The contact closure input device will accept both momentary and maintained
contact closures.
B. RS232 and Ethernet Interfaces:
1. Provide ability to communicate to System by means of user-supplied PC or
digital audiovisual equipment.
a. Provide access to:
1) Scene selections.
2) Fade zone to a level.
3) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
4) Lock out scenes and zones.
5) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
b. Provide status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates.
2. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface
a. Provide access to:
1) Scene selections.
2) Fade zone to a level.
3) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
4) Lock out scenes and zones.
5) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
b. Provide status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates.
c. Software to provide as follows:
1) System setup.
a) Program low voltage controls.
b) Set up and run time clock schedules.
c) Set up and run sequences.
d) Set and report time.
e) Archive system information.
f) Enable/disable wall station.
g) Enable/disable time clock.
2.8
SENSORS
A.
Ceiling-Mounted Infrared Receiver; [Lutron Model GRX-CIR-WH]:
1.
Ceiling-Mounted Infrared Receivers have 360 degree reception of wireless infrared
remote controls.
B.
Interior Daylight Sensors; [Lutron Model MW-FPS-WH]:
1.
Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication
2.
Can be replaced without reprogramming
3.
Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Stable output over temperature from 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C
Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting
and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection
Provide linear response from 0 to 500 foot-candles
Constructed with plastic meeting UL94 HB
Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles
Constructed via sonic welding
Color:
a. Match NEMA WD1, Section 2, White.
C.
Exterior Daylight Sensors:
1.
Calibrated with independent turn-on and turn-off thresholds; minimum 2 foot-candles
difference between the turn-on and turn-off thresholds.
2.
Enclosed in weatherproof housing with shading and lens protection visor.
D.
Infrared Partition Sensor; [Lutron Model GRX-IRPS-WH]:
1.
Provide contact closure based on status of sensor.
E.
Ceiling and Wall Mount Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors
1.
Product: SELECT:[LOS-CUS-500-WH], [LOS-CUS-1000-WH], [LOS-CUS-2000WH], [LOS-CIR-450-WH], [LOS-CIR-1500-WH], [LOS-CDT-500-WH], [LOS-CDT500R-WH], [LOS-CDT-1000-WH], [LOS-CDT-1000R-WH], [LOS-CDT-2000-WH],
[LOS-CDT-2000R-WH], [LOS-WIR-WH], [LOS-WDT-WH], [LOS-WDT-R-WH].
2.
Sensing mechanism:
1.
Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lenses, with internal grooves to eliminate
dust and residue build-up.
2.
Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be
crystal controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
3.
Dual technology:
i.
Utilize multiple segmented lenses, with internal grooves to eliminate dust
and residue build-up.
ii.
Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal
controlled to operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
3.
Sensors shall turn off or reduce lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a
room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space
4.
Sensor shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours
and habits.
5.
Sensors shall be UL listed.
6.
Sensors shall be fully adaptive and adjust their sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal
lighting control for any use of the space
7.
Sensors shall have field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override any
adaptive features.
8.
Power failure memory:
Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and subsequently
restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected memory shall not be lost.
9.
Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.
10.
Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.
11.
Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors.
12.
Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling mounted
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
13.
14.
F.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
sensors using infrared technology.
Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors.
[Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed
and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control
options.]
Sensor Power Packs
1.
For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) shall be able to
mount through a 1/2" knock-out in a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated,
self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a
transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide power to a
minimum of three (3) sensors.
2.
Power pack shall be plenum rated
3.
Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded
U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums,
where applicable.
4.
5.
ACCESSORIES
1.
Tamper Proof Covers:
i.
Locking covers for preset control units and wall stations: Reversible to
allow lock to be located on either side of control.
ii.
Compatible with IR controls.
iii.
Does not reduce specified IR range by more than 50 percent of its
original specification.
2.
Emergency Lighting Interface; Lutron LUT-ELI
i.
Provides total system listing to UL924 when used with Lutron GRAFIK
Eye 4000 system.
ii.
Senses all three phases of building power.
iii.
Provides an output to power panels if power on any phase fails.
iv.
Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.
3.
Infrared Transmitters:
i.
Provide wireless remote control capable of recalling preset light levels
for [four] [eight] scenes plus “off” and of fine-tuning light levels with
master raise/lower.
ii.
Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and
lighting control; dependent on that receiver, not transmitter.
iii.
Operate up to 15 meters (50 feet) within line-of-sight to that receiver.
iv.
“Learnable” by other variable frequency remote controls.
REMOTE ACCESS
1.
Provide web-based support through control panel or head end to allow
troubleshooting, diagnostics and software upgrades.
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
INSTALLATION
a.
Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables.”
b.
c.
d.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Provide complete installation of System in accordance with Contract Documents.
Define each dimmer's load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control
functions.
Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide
any additional equipment required to provide control intent.
Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light
sources; ceiling mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors shall not have
direct view of luminaries.
Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup and other services
necessary for the proper installation of the products/System as indicated on the
Drawings and specified herein. System setup shall include defining each
dimmers load type, assigning each load to a zone and setting the control
functions.
Systems Integration:
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Equipment Integration Meeting Visit
(1)
Facility Representative to coordinate meeting between
Cleveland Clinic Representative, Lighting Control System
Manufacturer and other related equipment manufacturers to discuss
equipment and integration procedures.
B.
START-UP AND PROGRAMMING
1. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper System
installation and operation under following parameters:
a.
b.
Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:
a. Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.
Make a visit upon completion of installation of modular dimming control system:
a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.
b. Verify connection and location of controls.
c. Program system data.
d. Verify proper connection of digital control link.
e. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
f. Obtain sign-off on System functions.
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 11
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
g.
User to be trained on System operation.
C. After Hours Start-up
Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s start-up
procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7a.m. to 5 p.m.)
1.
D. Tech Support
1.
E.
F.
Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
CLOSE OUT ACTIVITIES
1.
Training Visit
a. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 2 days additional on-site
System training to Cleveland Clinic personnel.
2.
On-Site Walkthrough
a. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field
Service Engineer to demonstrate System functionality to the Commissioning
Agent.
MAINTENANCE
1.
Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in
continental United States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special
visas are required.
2.
Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor,
and annual training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after
date of System startup.
END OF SECTION 260933
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260933 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 260936 - MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS
PART 1– GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Section, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.3
Modular dimming control systems and components.
Related Sections:
1. Section 265100 “Interior Lighting” for LED drivers controlled by Modular Dimming
Control System.
2. Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for wall box dimmers and occupancy
sensors.
3. Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for wiring and
cabling.
4. Section 260523 “Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables” for low voltage control
cabling.
5. Section 260933 “Central Dimming Controls” for Architectural Dimming Systems.
6. Section 260943 “Network Lighting Controls” for low voltage, manual and
programmable lighting control systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Modular Dimming Control: Factory assembled dimming control, interfaces, and modules.
Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces, and sensors.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service
condition requirements, and installed features
a. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage
range diagrams
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation detail for Modular Dimming Controls
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
1.
Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring including component
interconnections.
a. Include requirements for interfacing with other systems.
2.
Submit project specific wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited
to, power interfaces, wall stations, lighting control modules, low voltage control
interfaces, dimming ballasts, switching modules and sensors.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Field quality control test reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10years experience in manufacture of architectural lighting
controls.
B.
Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards, including
in-house engineering for product design activities.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
D. Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.
1.6
WARRANTIES
A. Modular Dimming Controls shall have minimum standard five (5) year warranty.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:
1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
2. CCF approved equal (must be approved in writing by CCF Facilities Engineering)
B.
Substitutions:
1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for
approval by Cleveland Clinic a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and
must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a
review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
C.
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Cleveland Clinic or Engineer at
Contractor's expense.
By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated
costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete
engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original
design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to
rough-in.
Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from
a single supplier.
GENERAL
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as
suitable for the purpose indicated.
B.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as
necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.
C.
Shade Control Requirements [IF REQUIRED ON PROJECT]
1. Capable of operating shades and recalling shade presets via keypad, contact closure
input, infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control
system interface.
2. Capable of operating any individual, group, or subgroup of shade electronic drive units
within system without requiring separate group controllers.
3. Capable of assigning and reassigning individual, groups, and subgroups of shades to
any control within system without requiring additional wiring or hardware changes.
4. Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.17
mm) throughout entire travel.
5. Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade
grouping and sub grouping and system configuration.
6. Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to start,
stop and move in unison.
7. Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) at any point
between open and close limits.
8. Capable of storing up to 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any
other position.
D. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at
any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104
degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
E.
Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic
discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
F.
Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment:
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (2 degrees C)
below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully
loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature.
Inrush Tolerance:
a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs)
and isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least
two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay.
b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current
without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.
Surge Tolerance:
a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according
to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance.
b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000
V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance.
Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within
3 seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full
off) as prior to power interruption.
Dimming Requirements:
a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for
incoming line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus
2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz
change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise.
1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include
external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.
b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps
lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible
steps are not acceptable.
e. Load Types:
1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve
for the specific light source to be controlled.
2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per
circuit.
f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit
basis.
g. Line Voltage Dimmers:
1) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate
transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control
dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended
specific ELV transformers being provided.
h. Low Voltage Dimming Modules:
1) Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage
Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone.
2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
6.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
light sources:
a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
. Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
. Sink current according to IEC 60929.
. Source current.
b) 10-0 V reverse analog voltage signal.
c) DSI digital communication.
d) DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:
. Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929.
. Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.
e) PWM per IEC 60929.
Switching Requirements:
a. Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
b. Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and
resistive loads.
G. Device Finishes:
1. Wall Controls: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.
3. Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color
units.
4. Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light
sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
H. Interface with building automation system as specified in Mechanical Sections.
2.3
LED DRIVERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Operate for at least 50,000 hours at maximum case temperature and 90 percent noncondensing relative humidity.
2. Provide thermal fold-back protection by automatically reducing power output
(dimming) to protect LED driver and LED light engine/fixture from damage due to
over-temperature conditions that approach or exceed the LED driver's maximum
operating temperature at calibration point.
3. Provide integral recording of operating hours and maximum operating temperature to
aid in troubleshooting and warranty claims.
4. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when
tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
5. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
UL Type TL rated where possible to allow for easier fixture evaluation and listing of
different driver series.
UL 1598C listed for field replacement as applicable.
Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE
C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10
percent change in line-voltage input.
LED drivers of the same family/series to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all
light levels.
Offer programmable output currents in 10 mA increments within designed driver
operating ranges for custom fixture length and lumen output configurations, while
meeting a low-end dimming range of 100 to 1 percent or 100 to 5 percent as applicable.
Meet NEMA 410 inrush requirements.
Employ integral fault protection up to 277 V to prevent LED driver damage or failure in
the event of incorrect application of line-voltage to communication link inputs.
LED driver may be remote located up to 100 feet (30 m) from LED light engine
depending on power outputs required and wire gauge utilized by installer.
B.
3-Wire Control:
1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.
C.
Digital Control (when used with compatible Lutron lighting control systems):
1. Employ power failure memory; LED driver to automatically return to the previous
state/light level upon restoration of utility power.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.
3. Automatically go to 100 percent light output upon loss of control link voltage and lock
out system commands until digital control link voltage is restored. Manufacturer to
offer UL 924 compliance achievable through use of external Lutron Model LUT-ELI3PSH interface upon request.
4. Each driver responds independently per system maximum:
a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.
b. Up to 16 daylight sensors.
5. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and a
load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the
maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to
27 percent).
D. Product(s):
1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent
Dimming; Lutron A-Series (LTE-Series):
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.
b. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial and
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
residential applications at 120 V.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for 40 W
loads; complies with ANSI C82.11.
d. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure
a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 53 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 200
mA to 2.1 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure a
compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) UL listed.
e. Constant Voltage Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 10 V to
60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) UL listed.
3-Wire and Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron A-Series (L3D-Series):
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.
b. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial
applications at 120 V or 277 V.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for loads
greater than 25 W typical (higher for select models); complies with ANSI C82.11.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
d.
3.
Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure
a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 53 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 200
mA to 2.1 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure a
compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) UL listed.
e. Constant Voltage Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 10 V to
60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) UL listed.
Digital Control, One Percent Dimming with Soft-On and Fade-to-Black Low End
Performance; Lutron EcoSystem H-Series (LDE1-Series):
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent measured output current.
b. Smooth fade-to-on and fade-to-black low end dimming performance for an
incandescent-like dimming experience.
c. Typically dissipates 0.2 W standby power at 120 V and 0.3 W standby power at
277 V.
d. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial
applications at 120-277 V.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
e.
4.
2.4
Employs true Constant Current Reduction (CCR) dimming method from 100 to
five percent light level and Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method
from five percent to off.
f. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) frequency of 240 Hz.
g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for drivers
greater than 25 W; complies with ANSI C82.11.
h. UL Class 2 output.
i. Driver outputs to be short circuit protected, open circuit protected, and overload
protected.
j. Constant Current Driver; Lutron K-Case Form Factor: Support for fixtures from
220 mA to 1.4 A over multiple operating ranges.
1) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
2) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
k. Constant Current Driver; Lutron M-Case Form Factor: Support for fixtures from
400 mA to 2.1 A over multiple operating ranges.
1) Support LED arrays up to 75 W.
2) Models available to meet the Design Lights Consortium (DLC) power line
quality requirements.
4-Wire, 0-10v Dimming
a. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent measured output current
POWER INTERFACES
A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
B.
General Requirements:
1. Phase independent of control input.
2. Rated for use in air-handling spaces as defined in UL 2043.
3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of
system or processor.
C.
Product(s):
1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module; Lutron PHPM-PA: Provides interface for phase
control input to provide full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for
compatible loads.
2. Switching Power Module; Lutron PHPM-SW: Provides interface for phase control or
switched input to provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim
loads.
3. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire Fluorescent/LED Input; Lutron PHPMWBX: Provides interface for fluorescent ballast/LED driver control input to provide full
16 A circuit output for compatible loads.
4. Ten Volt Interface; Lutron GRX-TVI: Provides interface for phase control input to
provide full 16 A circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
compatible fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts or LED drivers.
2.5
LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES
A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B.
UL listed.
C.
Contact Closure Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-IO.
2. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
3. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.
4. Contact closure can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such
as time of day or partition status.
D. Wallbox Input Closure Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-WCI.
2. Mounts in wallbox behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight
contact closure inputs.
3. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
E.
RS232 and Ethernet Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-NWK-E.
2. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,
touchscreens, etc.
3. Provide control of:
a. Light scene selections.
b. Fine-tuning of light scene levels with raise/lower.
c. Shade group presets.
d. Fine-tuning of shade preset levels with raise/lower.
e. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.
4. Provide status monitoring of:
a. Light scene status.
b. Shade group status.
c. Wall station button presses and releases.
d. Wall station LEDs.
5. Provide ability to send custom output strings.
F.
DMX Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSM-CI-DMX.
2. Provide ability to:
a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color
control.
Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel.
Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade.
Automatically sequence through a variety of colors.
Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit.
G. Sensor Modules:
1. Products:
a. Sensor module with both wired and wireless inputs; Lutron Model QSM2-4W-C.
b. Sensor module with wired inputs only; Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C.
c. Sensor module with wireless inputs only; Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C.
2. Wired Modules:
a. Provide wired inputs for:
1) Occupancy sensors.
2) Daylight sensors.
3) IR receivers for personal control.
4) Digital ballast wall stations.
3. Wireless Modules:
a. Provide wireless communication inputs for:
1) Occupancy sensors.
2) Daylight sensors.
3) Wireless controller.
b. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving devices.
c. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operates in FCC governed frequency spectrum for
periodic operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.
4. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by
compatible devices.
2.6
MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS)
A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS.
B.
Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to
control the loads as indicated.
C.
Finish: Standard white with white top door, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings.
E.
Integrated Wireless Capability:
1. Provide wireless communication inputs for:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Daylight sensors.
c. Wireless controller.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
F.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s).
RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic
operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.
Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:
1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
2. User-programmable zone and scene names.
3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
4. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface provides access to:
a. Scene selections.
b. Fade zone to a level.
c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
d. Lock out scenes and zones.
e. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
f. Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.
g. Enable/disable wall station.
5. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.
6. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
7. Integral wide angle infrared receiver.
8. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
9. Direct Low-Voltage Control of Digital Ballasts and LED drivers (120 V, 277 V and/or
347 V Lighting):
a. Electronically link drivers to a zone for both dimming and turning on/off.
b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to drivers and line voltage dimmers for
proportional daylight harvesting.
c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal
conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface.
10. Creates daylighting rows independent of control zones.
11. Capable of re-zoning without re-wiring using programming display on unit.
12. Outputs can be virtually mapped to other device's outputs.
13. Zone raise/lower buttons capable of controlling local lighting loads connected to the
main unit or remote lighting zones in the system.
G. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override:
1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control.
2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
H. Provides one direct-wired occupancy sensor connection without interface or power pack.
2.7
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES
A. Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
General Requirements:
1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.
2. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.
3. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
4. Mounting: Surface.
5. Connection without interface to wired:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Daylight sensors.
c. IR receivers for personal control.
6. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight
sensors, and IR receivers.
7. Contact Closure Input:
a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state output
without interface to:
1) Activate scenes.
a) Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure.
2) Enable or disable after hours.
a) Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time has
elapsed.
b) System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping lights to
user-specified level.
c) Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system.
3) Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).
a) Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified amount.
8. Emergency Contact Closure Input:
a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input
from UL 924 listed emergency lighting interface, security system or fire alarm
system.
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
9. Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces.
10. Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules.
11. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.
C.
Switching Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S16-S: 16 A continuous-use
per channel.
2. Switching:
a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting
loads.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power
is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 13
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
d.
e.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect
the load from line supply.
D. 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron 0-10 V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per
channel.
2. Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay:
Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.
3. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
a. 0-10 V analog voltage signal.
1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10 V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
2) Sink current per IEC 60929.
b. 10-0 V analog voltage signal.
1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10 V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
2) Sink current per IEC 60929.
4. Switching:
a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting
loads.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power
is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect
the load from line supply.
E.
Digital Fixture Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-1ECO-S: One EcoSystem
Digital Link.
b. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-S: Two EcoSystem
Digital Links.
2. Provides two-way feedback with digital fixtures for energy monitoring, light level
status, lamp failure reporting, and ballast/driver failure reporting.
3. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.
4. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts or LED
drivers capable of NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.
F.
Total Light Management Control Module (Digital Lighting and Shades Control):
1. Product: Lutron EcoSystem with Shades Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-PS120
- Two EcoSystem Digital Links.
2. Ten fused 30 W (60 W peak) 24 VDC outputs provide power to compatible shades,
drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories.
3. Provide power for 10 to 30 shades dependent on shade dimensions.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 14
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
5.
6.
2.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Provide smart diagnostics for system verification.
Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.
Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts capable of
NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.
WALL STATIONS
A. Line Voltage Control Unit:
1.
Preset lighting control with zone override:
a. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
b. Each zone and scene to be field customizable to indicate each zone and scene
name.
c. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface.
1) Provide access to:
a) Scene selections.
b) Fade zone to a level.
c) Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
d) Lock out scenes and zones.
e) Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
f) Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.
g) Enable/disable wall station.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
B.
Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.
Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
Incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver.
For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
h. Direct low-voltage control of digital ballasts (120V/277V lighting).
Color:
a. Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the
Architect.
Architectural Low Voltage Wall Stations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Electronics:
a. Use RS485 wiring for low voltage communication.
Functionality:
a. LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button
press was properly processed or the LEDs turn off if the button press was not
processed.
b. Allow for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
Color:
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 15
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
2.9
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Color to be white, ivory or grey. Custom colors to be coordinated with the
Architect.
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE
A. Lighting Control Module:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Mechanical:
a. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment approved as applicable.
b. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.
c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
Surface mounted.
Switching:
a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power
is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of
up to 16 amps, of high in-rush lighting load (LED, electronic low-voltage and
motor loads).
Connection without interface to wired:
a. Occupancy sensors
b. Daylight sensors
c. IR receivers for personal control
Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485.
LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight
sensors, and IR receivers.
Thermal protection reports to Light Management System if module overheats.
Contact Closure Input.
a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state
output without interface to:
1) Activate scenes.
2) Enable or disable time clock.
Emergency Contact Closure Input
a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input
from UL 924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm
system.
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
0-10V Lighting Control Module:
1.
Meet the following requirements:
a. Coordination between low voltage dimming module and line voltage relay:
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 16
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.
b. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light
sources:
1) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
a) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
b) Sink current via IEC 60929.
2. Mechanical:
a. Listed to UL 508 as applicable.
b. Delivered and installed as a UL listed factory assembled panel.
c. Panels passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
3. Surface mounted.
4. Switching:
a. Rated life of relay: Minimum 1,000,000 cycles.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power
is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to 4 individually controlled zones, each with a capacity of
up to 16 amps, of high in-rush lighting load (LED, electronic low-voltage and
motor loads).
5. Connection without interface to wired:
a. Occupancy sensors
b. Daylight sensors
c. IR receivers for personal control
6. Connects to Lighting Management Panel via RS485.
7. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight
sensors, and IR receivers.
8. Thermal protection reports to Light Management System if module overheats.
9. Contact Closure Input.
a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or solid-state
output without interface to:
1) Activate scenes
2) Enable or disable time clock.
10. Emergency Contact Closure Input
a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input
from UL 924 Listed Emergency Lighting Interface, security system or fire alarm
system
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
2.10
SENSORS
A. Sensors: Occupancy sensors, daylight sensors as specified in Division 26 Section 260923
“Lighting Control Devices”.
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 17
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.11
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
REMOTE ACCESS
A. Provide web-based support through control panel or head end to allow troubleshooting,
diagnostics and software upgrades.
2.12
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform full-function testing on completed assemblies at end of line. Statistical sampling is
not acceptable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.”
B.
Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.
C.
Define each dimmer's load type and set control functions.
D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any
additional equipment required to provide control intent.
E.
Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.
F.
Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources;
ceiling mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of
luminaries.
G.
Systems Integration:
1.
3.2
Equipment Integration Meeting Visit
a. Facility Representative to coordinate meeting between Cleveland Clinic
Representative, Lighting Control System Manufacturer and other related
equipment manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.
STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING
A. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper System
installation and operation under following parameters:
1.
Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 18
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
B.
After Hours Start-up
1.
C.
Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Training Visit
1.
B.
Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 2 days additional on-site system
training to Cleveland Clinic personnel.
On-site Walkthrough
1.
3.4
Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s start-up
procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7a.m. to 5 p.m.)
Tech Support
1.
3.3
a. Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.
Make a visit upon completion of installation of modular dimming control system:
a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.
b. Verify connection and location of controls.
c. Program system data.
d. Verify proper connection of digital control link.
e. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
f. Obtain sign-off on System functions.
g. User to be trained on System operation.
Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field Service
Engineer to demonstrate System functionality to the Commissioning Agent.
MAINTENANCE
A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United
States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.
B.
Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual
training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of System startup.
END OF SECTION 260936
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 19
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS_2015
260936 - 20
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
SECTION 260943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Section, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Network Lighting Control System.
2. Power interfaces.
3. Main units (Lutron Grafik Eye QS).
4. Lighting control modules (Lutron Energi Savr Node).
5. Energy meter.
6. Lighting management hubs.
7. Lighting management system computers.
8. Lighting management system software.
9. Control stations.
10. Low-voltage control interfaces.
11. Wired sensors.
12. Wireless sensors.
13. Accessories.
B.
1.3
Related Sections:
1. Section 265100 “Interior Lighting” for LED drivers controlled by Network Lighting
Control System.
2. Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for wiring and
cabling.
3. Section 260523 “Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables” for low voltage control
cabling.
4. Section 260923 “Lighting Control Devices” for occupancy sensors used in conjunction
with Central Dimming Control System.
5. Section 260933 “Central Dimming Controls” for factory assembled dimming and
switching panels, interfaces and modules. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces
and sensors.
6. Section 260936 “Modular Dimming Controls” for factory assembled dimming control,
interfaces, and modules. Low voltage wall stations, control interfaces, and sensors.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Network Lighting Control System:
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
Computer-based software that provides control,
260943 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
configuration, monitoring and reports. Lighting management panels, low voltage wall
stations, control interfaces and sensors, and LED drivers.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation detail for Network Lighting Controls.
1. Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring.
2. Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to, power
interfaces, wall stations, and lighting control modules, low voltage control interfaces,
dimming drivers, switching modules and sensors.
3. Shall include catalog cut sheets with performance specifications including historical
testing data demonstrating complete compliance to all of the Specifications herein.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency,
operation and maintenance manuals.
D. Field quality control test reports.
1.5
E.
Shall include a complete schematic of the System.
F.
Sequence of Operation to describe how each area operates and how any building wide
functionality is described.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of Network Lighting Control
Systems.
B.
Network Lighting Control System shall be UL Listed specifically for the required loads.
Manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance on request.
C.
Manufacturer shall have their quality system registered to the ISO 9001 Quality Standard,
including in-house engineering for all product design activities. Due to the exclusion of the
Design Control element, ISO 9002 Registration is not acceptable.
D. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in
accordance with warranty.
E.
1.6
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive
equipment:
1. Ambient Temperature:
a. Lighting Control System: 0º to 40º C (32º to 104º F).
2. Relative Humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
3. Lighting Control System must be protected from dust during installation.
B.
1.8
Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute
limits.
WARRANTY
A. Network Lighting Controls shall have minimum standard five (5) year warranty.
1.9
COMMISSIONING
A. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper System
installation and operation under following parameters:
1. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:
a. Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.
2. Make a visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control System:
a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.
b. Verify connection and location of controls.
c. Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.
d. Check dimming panel load types and currents and remove by-pass jumpers.
e. Verify System operation control by control, circuit by circuit.
f. Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
g. Obtain sign-off on System functions.
h. Cleveland Clinic to be trained on System operation.
1.10
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to
the Cleveland Clinic 24 hours a day seven days a week.
B.
Make new replacement parts available for minimum of ten years from date of manufacture.
C.
Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by:
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Lutron – Quantum.
Encilium – ECS.
B.
The Contractor shall use only Network Lighting Control System software and hardware by
the listed manufacturer which meets the requirement and intent of this Specification.
C.
Source Limitations: Furnish products by a single manufacturer and obtain from a single
supplier.
DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as
suitable for the purpose indicated.
B.
Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as
necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.
C.
Shade Control Requirements as required per project scope:
1. Capable of operating shades and recalling shade presets via keypad, contact closure
input, infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control
system interface.
2. Capable of operating any individual, group, or subgroup of shade electronic drive units
within system without requiring separate group controllers.
3. Capable of assigning and reassigning individual, groups, and subgroups of shades to
any control within system without requiring additional wiring or hardware changes.
4. Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.17
mm) throughout entire travel.
5. Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade
grouping and sub grouping and system configuration.
6. Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to start,
stop and move in unison.
7. Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) at any point
between open and close limits.
8. Capable of storing up to 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any
other position.
9. Capable of controlling lights and shades from single wall control button.
D. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at
any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104
degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
E.
Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic
discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
F.
Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment:
1. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (20 degrees C)
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully
loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature.
Inrush Tolerance:
a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs)
and isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least
two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay.
b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current
without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.
Surge Tolerance:
a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according
to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance.
b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000
V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance.
Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within
3 seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full
off) as prior to power interruption.
Dimming Requirements:
a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for
incoming line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus
2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz
change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line noise.
1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include
external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.
b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps
lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible
steps are not acceptable.
e. Load Types:
1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve
for the specific light source to be controlled.
2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per
circuit.
f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit
basis.
g. Line Voltage Dimmers:
1) Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers:
a) Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC
waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472.
b) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) to
include DC current protection in the event of a single device failure.
2) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate
transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase control
dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has recommended
specific ELV transformers being provided.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
h.
6.
Low Voltage Dimming Modules:
1) Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage
Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone.
2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following
light sources:
a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
. Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
. Sink current according to IEC 60929.
. Source current.
b) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.
c) DSI digital communication.
d) DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:
. Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929.
. Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.
e) PWM per IEC 60929.
Switching Requirements:
a. Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
b. Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is
applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and
resistive loads.
G. Device Finishes:
1. Wall Controls: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.
H. Interface with building automation system as specified in Mechanical Sections.
2.3
POWER PANELS
A. Provide power panels with configurations as indicated on the drawings.
B.
General Requirements:
1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.
2. Comply with UL 508A and IEC 60669-2-1 as applicable.
3. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.
4. Field wiring accessible from front of panel without removing dimmer assemblies or
other components.
5. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
6. Shipped with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position by means of jumper bar
inserted between input and load terminals. Jumpers to carry full rated load current and
be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass device to allow for switching operation of
connected load with dimmer removed by means of circuit breaker.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
7.
Provided with branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a
dedicated feed-through type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings.
8. Branch Circuit Breakers:
a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits.
b. Provided with visual trip indicator.
c. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to match the short
circuit current rating.
d. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature
protection. Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to
have integral thermal protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient
temperature is above rating of panel.
e. Equipped with provision for tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in
off position when servicing loads.
f. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other panel
components.
g. Listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers.
9. Provide panels with listed short circuit current rating as indicated
a. Minimum Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): [25,000 A; 45,000 A; 65,000 A;
or [_________A.].
10. Panel Processor Lutron Circuit Selector:
a. Provide the following capabilities:
1) Operate circuit directly from panel processor for system diagnostics and
provide feedback of system operation.
2) Electronically assign each circuit to any zone in lighting control system.
3) Determine normal/emergency function of panel and set emergency lighting
levels.
b. Where indicated on the drawings, panels to provide two control links. Each circuit
to be capable of transferring control based on independent programming between
architectural control system and theatrical controls utilizing the USITT DMX-512
1990 or ESTA DMX-512A protocol.
c. React to changes from control within 20 milliseconds.
11. Diagnostics and Service:
a. Replacing dimmer/relay does not require re-programming of system or processor.
b. Include diagnostic LEDs for dimmers/relays to verify proper operation and assist
in system troubleshooting.
c. Include tiered control scheme for dealing with component failure that minimizes
loss of control for occupant.
1) If lighting control system fails, lights to remain at current level. Panel
processor provides local control of lights until system is repaired.
2) If panel processor fails, lights to remain at current level. Circuit breakers can
be used to turn lights off or to full light output, allowing non-dim control of
lights until panel processor is repaired.
3) If dimmer fails, factory-installed mechanical bypass jumpers to allow each
dimmer to be mechanically bypassed. Mechanical bypass device to allow for
switching operation of connected load with dimmer removed by means of
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
circuit breaker.
C.
Product(s):
1. Specification Grade Dimming Panels:
a. Product: Lutron GP Series Dimming Panels.
b. Mounting: Surface.
c. Dimmers designed and tested specifically to control incandescent/tungsten,
magnetic low voltage, electronic low voltage, neon/cold cathode, fluorescent
dimming ballasts, and non-dim loads.
d. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize universal 16 A continuous-use listed
dimmers.
e. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load
type low voltage dimming modules.
f. Limit current rise time to minimum 350 microseconds as measured from 10 to 90
percent of load current waveform and minimum 525 microseconds as measured
from 0 to 100 percent of load current waveform at 50 percent rated dimmer
capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle. Current rise time to be minimum 400
microseconds as measured from 10 to 90 percent of load current waveform and
minimum 600 microseconds as measured from 0 to 100 percent of load current
waveform at 100 percent rated dimmer capacity at a 90 degree conduction angle.
g. Load faults only affect the given circuit.
2. Modular Dimming Panels:
a. Product: Lutron LP Series Dimming Panels.
b. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A feed
continuous-use listed dimming/switching modules.
d. For switching only circuits, utilize relays rated for minimum of 1,000,000 cycles at
fully rated current for all lighting loads.
e. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load
type low voltage dimming modules.
3. Modular Combination Panels:
a. Product: Lutron CCP Series Custom Combination Panels.
b. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
c. Unless otherwise indicated or required, utilize multiple load type 16 A feed
continuous-use listed dimming/switching modules.
d. For switching only circuits, utilize relays rated for typical 1,000,000 cycles at fully
rated 16 A for all lighting loads.
e. For loads requiring 0-10V, PWM, or DSI control, utilize compatible multiple load
type low voltage dimming modules.
4. Relay Panels:
a. Product: Lutron XP Series Switching Panels.
b. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
c. Switching Requirements:
1) Utilize 20 A continuous-use rated switching modules; able to switch 20 A
receptacles.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
2)
5.
2.4
Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
3) Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when
power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
4) Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and
resistive loads.
DC Dimming Panels:
a. Product: Lutron DCI Series Dimming Panels.
b. Mounting: Surface.
c. Meet recommended electrical noise levels of MRI system manufacturers.
d. Operate lamps free from audible noise and flicker throughout entire dimming
range.
e. In case of control system failure, supervisory circuit to shut down power to load.
f. Automatically detect and compensate for lamp failures to maintain consistent DC
voltage level.
LED DRIVERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Operate for at least 50,000 hours at maximum case temperature and 90 percent noncondensing relative humidity.
2. Provide thermal fold-back protection by automatically reducing power output
(dimming) to protect LED driver and LED light engine/fixture from damage due to
over-temperature conditions that approach or exceed the LED driver's maximum
operating temperature at calibration point.
3. Provide integral recording of operating hours and maximum operating temperature to
aid in troubleshooting and warranty claims.
4. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when
tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
5. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
6. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
7. UL Type TL rated where possible to allow for easier fixture evaluation and listing of
different driver series.
8. UL 1598C listed for field replacement as applicable.
9. Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V according to IEEE
C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
10. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
11. Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10
percent change in line-voltage input.
12. LED drivers of the same family/series to track evenly across multiple fixtures at all
light levels.
13. Offer programmable output currents in 10 mA increments within designed driver
operating ranges for custom fixture length and lumen output configurations, while
meeting a low-end dimming range of 100 to 1 percent or 100 to 5 percent as applicable.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
14. Meet NEMA 410 inrush requirements.
15. Employ integral fault protection up to 277 V to prevent LED driver damage or failure in
the event of incorrect application of line-voltage to communication link inputs.
16. LED driver may be remote located up to 100 feet (30 m) from LED light engine
depending on power outputs required and wire gauge utilized by installer.
B.
3-Wire Control:
1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.
C.
Digital Control (when used with compatible lighting control systems):
1. Employ power failure memory; LED driver to automatically return to the previous
state/light level upon restoration of utility power.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.
3. Automatically go to 100 percent light output upon loss of control link voltage and lock
out system commands until digital control link voltage is restored. Manufacturer to
offer UL 924 compliance achievable through use of external Lutron Model LUT-ELI3PSH interface upon request.
4. Each driver responds independently per system maximum:
a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.
b. Up to 16 daylight sensors.
5. Responds to digital load shed command.
D. Product(s):
1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent
Dimming
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.
b. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial
applications at 120 V.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for 40 W
loads; complies with ANSI C82.11.
d. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure
a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 53 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 200
mA to 2.1 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure a
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) UL listed.
e. Constant Voltage Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 10 V to
60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) UL listed.
3-Wire and Digital Control, One Percent Dimming
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.
b. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial
applications at 120 V or 277 V.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for loads
greater than 25 W typical (higher for select models); complies with ANSI C82.11.
d. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure
a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 53 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 200
mA to 2.1 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
dimming methods available.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 200 mA to 2.1 A to ensure a
compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or Constant Current Reduction (CCR)
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
dimming methods available.
c) UL listed.
e. Constant Voltage Drivers:
1) Support for downlights and pendant fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
2) Support for troffers, linear pendants, and linear recessed fixtures from 10 V to
60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
3) Support for cove and under-cabinet fixtures from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V
steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists.
a) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
b) Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method.
c) UL listed.
Digital Control, One Percent Dimming with Soft-On and Fade-to-Black Low End
Performance
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent measured output current.
b. Features smooth fade-to-on and fade-to-black low end dimming performance.
c. Typically dissipates 0.2 W standby power at 120 V and 0.3 W standby power at
277 V.
d. Complies with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for commercial
applications at 120-277 V.
e. Employs true Constant Current Reduction (CCR) dimming method from 100 to
five percent light level and Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) dimming method
from five percent to off.
f. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) frequency of 240 Hz.
g. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent at full output for drivers
greater than 25 W; complies with ANSI C82.11.
h. UL Class 2 output.
i. Driver outputs to be short circuit protected, open circuit protected, and overload
protected.
j. Constant Current Driver: Support for fixtures from 220 mA to 1.4 A over multiple
operating ranges.
1) Support LED arrays up to 40 W.
2) Models available that meet requirements for Energy Star compliance.
k. Constant Current Driver: Support for fixtures from 400 mA to 2.1 A over multiple
operating ranges.
1) Support LED arrays up to 75 W.
2) Models available to meet the Design Lights Consortium (DLC) power line
quality requirements.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
POWER INTERFACES
A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
2.6
B.
General Requirements:
1. Phase independent of control input.
2. Rated for use in air-handling spaces as defined in UL 2043.
3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming of
system or processor.
C.
Product(s):
1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module: Provides interface for phase control input to provide
full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for compatible loads.
2. 3-Wire Power Module: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A
circuit output for compatible line-voltage control LED drivers.
3. Switching Power Module: Provides interface for phase control or switched input to
provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim loads.
4. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire LED Input: Provides interface for /LED
driver control input to provide full 16 A circuit output for compatible loads.
5. Ten Volt Interface: Provides interface for phase control input to provide full 16 A
circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for compatible LED drivers.
MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS)
A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS.
B.
Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to
control the loads as indicated.
C.
Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.
D. Finish: Standard white with white top door, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings.
F.
Integrated Wireless Capability:
1. Provide wireless communication inputs for:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Daylight sensors.
c. Wireless controller.
2. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s).
3. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic
operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.
G. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:
1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 13
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
User-programmable zone and scene names.
Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
Astronomical time clock and programmer interface provides access to:
a. Scene selections.
b. Fade zone to a level.
c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
d. Lock out scenes and zones.
e. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
f. Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.
g. Enable/disable wall station.
Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.
Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
Integral wide angle infrared receiver.
For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
Direct Low-Voltage Control of LED drivers (120V or 277V Lighting):
a. Electronically link LED drivers to a zone for both dimming and turning on/off.
b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to LED drivers and line voltage dimmers for
proportional daylight harvesting.
c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal
conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface.
Creates daylighting rows independent of control zones.
Capable of re-zoning without re-wiring using programming display on unit.
Outputs can be virtually mapped to other device's outputs.
Zone raise/lower buttons capable of controlling local lighting loads connected to the
main unit or remote lighting zones in the system.
H. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override:
1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control.
2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
I.
2.7
Provides one direct-wired occupancy sensor connection without interface or power pack.
LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES
A. Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
B.
General Requirements:
1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.
2. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.
3. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
4. Mounting: Surface.
5. Connection without interface to wired:
a. Occupancy sensors.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 14
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
b. Daylight sensors.
c. IR receivers for personal control.
6. Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.
7. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight
sensors, and IR receivers.
8. Contact Closure Input:
a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state output
without interface to:
1) Activate scenes.
a) Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure.
2) Enable or disable after hours.
a) Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time has
elapsed.
b) System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping lights to
user-specified level.
c) Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system.
3) Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).
a) Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified amount.
9. Emergency Contact Closure Input:
a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure input
from UL 924 listed emergency lighting interface, security system or fire alarm
system.
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
10. Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces.
11. Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules.
12. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.
C.
Switching Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S16-S: 16 A continuous-use
per channel.
b. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S20-S: 20 A continuous-use
per channel.
2. Switching:
a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting
loads.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power
is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect
the load from line supply.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 15
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
D. 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron 0-10V Energi -Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per
channel.
2. Coordination between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay:
Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.
3. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
a. 0-10V analog voltage signal.
1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
2) Sink current per IEC 60929.
b. 10V-0V analog voltage signal.
1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
2) Sink current per IEC 60929.
4. Switching:
a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting
loads.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power
is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect
the load from line supply.
E.
Digital Fixture Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-1ECO-S: One EcoSystem
Digital Link.
b. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-S: Two EcoSystem
Digital Links.
2. Provides two-way feedback with digital fixtures for energy monitoring, light level
status, lamp failure reporting, and ballast/driver failure reporting.
3. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.
4. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts or LED
drivers capable of NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.
F.
Total Light Management Control Module (Digital Lighting and Shades Control):
1. Product: Lutron EcoSystem with Shades Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-PS120
- Two EcoSystem Digital Links.
2. Ten fused 30W (60W peak) 24V DC outputs provide power to compatible shades,
drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories.
3. Provide power for 10 to 30 shades dependent on shade dimensions.
4. Provide smart diagnostics for system verification.
5. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.
6. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts capable of
NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 16
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
ENERGY METER
A. Product: Lutron Quantum CPN5898 Series Class 500 Energy Meter.
B.
2.9
General Requirements:
1. Provides accurate, real-time energy metering and verification capability through frontend PC-based software.
2. Factory-calibrated;
not
requiring
preventative/scheduled
maintenance
or
cleaning/decontamination procedures.
3. Accepts up to three sets of current sensors to monitor up to three loads of the same
voltage with one meter.
4. Contains direct-read 8-digit LCD display of cumulative kWh.
5. Current Sensors: Split-core; capable of being placed up to 500 feet (152 m) from the
meter without power interruption.
6. Connects to server via Ethernet.
7. UL listed.
8. Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.5 percent, certified to ANSI C12.20.
9. NEMA 12 housing.
10. Provide voltage and current ratings suitable for the installed location.
DIGITAL SWITCHING MODULES
A. Provide digital switching modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B.
2.10
General Requirements:
1. Provide continuous 3-wire signal dimming to compatible 3-wire electronic dimming
drivers.
2. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
3. Connect without interface to:
a. Occupancy sensor.
b. Daylight sensor.
c. Personal control input (wall station or infrared receiver).
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT HUBS
A. Product: Lutron Quantum Light Management Hub.
B.
Provided in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal blocks listed for field
wiring.
C.
Connects to controls and power panels via RS485.
D. Enables light management software to control and monitor compatible dimming ballasts and
ballast modules, power panels, power modules, and window treatments.
1. Utilizes Ethernet connectivity to light management computer utilizing one of the
following methods:
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 17
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
c.
d.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Dedicated network.
Dedicated VLAN.
Shared network with Building Management System (BMS).
Corporate network where managed switches are configured to allow multicasting
and use of IGMP.
E.
Integrates control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external
inputs into a single customizable lighting control system with:
1. Multiple Failsafe Mechanisms:
a. Power failure detection via emergency lighting interface.
b. Protection: Lights go to full on if ballast wires are shorted.
c. Distributed architecture provides fault containment. Single hub failure or loss of
power does not compromise lights and shades connected to other lighting
management hubs.
2. Manual overrides.
3. Automatic control.
4. Central computer control and monitoring.
5. Integration with BMS via BACnet.
F.
Furnished with astronomical time clock. [or]
G. Furnished with solar clock to track the position of the sun to control the shades to limit
penetration of direct sunlight.
H. Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more
than ten years without power.
I.
BACnet Integration License:
1. Provide ability to communicate by means of native BACnet IP communication (does
not require interface) to lighting control system from a user-supplied 10BASE-T or
100BASE-T Ethernet network.
2. Requires only one network connection per system.
3. Lighting control system to be BACnet Test Laboratory (BTL) listed.
4. Basic BACnet integration license:
a. The BACnet integrator can command:
1) Area light output.
2) Area enable or disable after hours mode.
3) Area load shed level.
4) Area load shed enable/disable.
5) Area shade group presets and levels.
6) Enable/Disable:
a) Automated solar adaptive shade control.
b) Cloudy day/shadow override mode for automated shade control.
c) Brightness override mode for automated shade control.
d) Area occupancy sensors.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 18
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
J.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
e) Area daylighting.
7) Daylighting level.
8) Area occupied and unoccupied level
9) Occupancy sensor timeouts.
The BACnet integrator can monitor:
1) Area on/off status.
2) Area occupancy status.
3) Area fault.
a) Lamp failures.
b) Control devices not responding.
4) Area load shed status.
5) Area instantaneous energy usage and maximum potential power usage.
6) Energy savings broken out by strategy (occupancy, timeclock, daylighting,
personal control, tuning, load shed) down to the individual area.
7) Area shade group presets and levels.
8) Cloudy day and shadow sensor status.
9) Light levels from window mounted sensors.
10) Enable/Disable:
a) Status of automated solar adaptive shade control.
b) Status of cloudy day/shadow override for automated shade control.
c) Status of brightness override for automated shade control.
d) Area occupancy sensors.
e) Daylighting.
11) Daylighting level.
12) Light levels from photo sensors.
13) Area occupied and unoccupied level.
14) Occupancy sensor timeouts.
Shade assignment and grouping to be discoverable with third party building
management software.
Integration with other devices over Ethernet via Telnet using the Lutron Integration Protocol.
K. Control other devices over Ethernet via TCP or Telnet by sending device specific strings.
2.11
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM COMPUTERS [SELECT A OR B]
A. No computers to be provided. Lighting Control System Manufacturer authorized Service
Representative to perform system start-up without on-site computer.
B.
Computers:
1. Product: Lutron Q-Manager.
2. System PC (Desktop/Laptop):
a. Suitable for occasional programming, monitoring, and control of digital network
lighting controls.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 19
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
b.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated, computer(s) to be provided by lighting control system
manufacturer.
c. Quantity: To be determined; provide allowance for [_____] computer(s).
d. Location(s): As indicated on the drawings.
e. Minimum Hardware Requirements:
1) Processor: Single Intel® Core® i3 processor with minimum speed of 2.4
GHz.
2) 4 GB RAM.
3) 250 GB hard drive (40 GB for application).
4) One 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface for communication with lighting
management hubs.
5) Monitor with 1280 x 1024 resolution.
6) 4 USB 2.0 ports.
7) Dedicated Graphics Card with 256 MB of memory.
f. Minimum Software Requirements:
1) Licensed installation of US English 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® 7
Professional with Service Pack 1 or US English 64-bit Microsoft®
Windows® 8 Professional.
2) Microsoft® Internet Information Services (IIS) 7 or later.
3) Microsoft® Internet Explorer 9 or later.
4) Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5.
Server:
a. Suitable for 24 hour per day, 7 day per week programming, monitoring, control,
and data logging of digital-network lighting controls.
b. Suitable to handle client machine request in multi-computer systems.
c. Unless otherwise indicated, computer to be provided by CCF
d. Minimum Hardware Requirements:
1) Processor: Quad Core Intel® Xeon® processor with minimum speed of 2.8
GHz.
2) 8 GB Ram.
3) 250 GB hard drive (40 GB for application and database).
4) Two 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interfaces - one for communication with
lighting management hubs and one for communication with corporate intranet
to allow access from system PCs and/or energy saving display terminals. Only
one Ethernet network interface is required if all lighting management hubs
and client PCs are on the same network.
5) Monitor with 1280 x 1024 resolution.
6) 4 USB 2.0 ports.
7) Dedicated Graphics Card with 256 MB of memory.
e. Minimum Software Requirements:
1) Licensed installation of US English 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® Server
2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 R1.
2) Microsoft® Internet Information Services (IIS) 7 or later.
3) Microsoft® Internet Explorer 9 or later.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 20
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
5.
2.12
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
4) Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5.
Energy Savings Display Terminals:
a. Suitable for displaying energy savings data on user-supplied display.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, computer(s) to be provided the CCF
c. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.
d. Location(s): As indicated on the drawings.
e. Minimum Hardware Requirements:
1) Processor: Single Intel® Core® i3 processor with minimum speed of 2.4
GHz.
2) 4 GB RAM.
3) 250 GB hard drive (40 GB for application and database).
4) One 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface for communication with lighting
management hubs.
5) Monitor with 1280 x 1024 resolution.
6) 4 USB 2.0 ports.
7) Dedicated Graphics Card with 256 MB of memory.
f. Minimum Software Requirements:
1) Licensed installation of US English 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® 7
Professional with Service Pack 1 or US English 64-bit Microsoft®
Windows® 8 Professional.
Computers Provided by Lighting Control System Manufacturer: Computer software to
be preinstalled and tested prior to shipping.
LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and
warranted by a single manufacturer.
B.
Configuration Setup Software:
1. Product: Lutron Q-Design.
2. Suitable to make system programming and configuration changes.
3. Windows-based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over
TCP/IP connection.
4. Allows end-user (with training) to:
a. Capture system design:
1) Geographical layout.
2) Load schedule zoning.
3) Shade grouping.
4) Equipment schedule.
5) Equipment assignment to lighting management hubs.
6) Daylighting design.
b. Define the configuration for the following in each area:
1) Lighting scenes.
2) Shade group presets.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 21
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
c.
C.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
3) Control station devices.
4) Interface and integration equipment.
5) Occupancy/after hours.
6) Partitioning.
7) Daylighting.
8) Emergency lighting.
9) Night lights.
Startup:
1) Addressing.
2) Daylighting.
3) Provide customized conditional programming.
Control and Monitor Software:
1. Products:
a. Lutron Quantum Vue (web-based application).
b. Lutron Q-Admin (desktop application).
2. Accessibility and Platform Support:
a. Lutron Quantum Vue Web-Based Application:
1) Web-based; runs on most HTML5 compatible browsers (including Internet
Explorer, Chrome, and Safari).
2) Supports multiple platforms and devices; runs from a tablet, desktop, laptop,
or smartphone; optimized for displays of 1024 by 768 pixels or higher.
3) User interface supports multi-touch gestures such as pinch to zoom, drag to
pan, etc.
4) Utilizes HTTPS (industry-standard certificate-based encryption and
authentication for security).
b. Lutron Q-Admin Desktop Application:
1) Client installation for Windows-based operating systems only.
3. System Navigation and Status Reporting:
a. Lutron Quantum Vue Web-Based Application: Performed using graphical floor
plan view or a generic system layout.
1) Graphical Floor Plan View: Utilizes customized CAD based drawing of the
building. Pan and zoom feature allows for easy navigation; dynamically
adjusts the details presented based on zoom level.
2) Area, scene, and zone names can be changed in real time.
b. Lutron Q-Admin Desktop Application: Performed using basic system tree view.
4. Control of Lights:
a. Area lights can be monitored for on/off status.
b. All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level.
c. For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting
scene, and individual zones may be controlled.
d. Area lighting scenes can be renamed and modified in real-time, changing the levels
that zones go to when a scene is activated.
e. High and low end of area lighting can be tuned/trimmed.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 22
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
f. Control and monitor area partition status.
5. Control of Shades:
a. Area shades can be monitored for current preset or position.
b. Area shades can be opened/closed, sent to a preset, or sent to a specific position.
6. Occupancy:
a. Area occupancy can be monitored.
b. Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of
occupancy sensor problems.
c. Area occupancy settings including level that lights turn on to when area is
occupied, and level that lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed
in real-time.
d. Monitor energy savings due to occupancy down to an individual area.
7. Daylighting:
a. Daylighting can be enabled/disabled. Can be used to override the control currently
taking place in the space.
b. Daylight calibration can be adjusted for each daylit area.
c. Daylight status can be monitored.
d. Monitor energy savings due to daylight harvesting down to an individual area.
8. Load Shedding; Lutron Intelli-Demand: Allows the building manager to monitor whole
building lighting power usage and apply a customized load shed reduction to selected
areas, thereby reducing a building's power usage; load shedding triggered via Quantum
software, BACnet, or OpenADR.
9. Scheduling: Schedule time of day and astronomic time clock events to automate
functions.
a. Adjust or disable a single occurrence of a repeating scheduled event.
b. Easily monitor and adjust scheduled events using a weekly calendar view.
10. Reporting: Provide reporting capability that allows the building manager to gather realtime and historical information about the system as follows:
a. Energy Reports: Show a comparison of cumulative energy used over a period of
time for one or more areas or meter groups.
b. Power Reports: Show power usage trend over a period of time for one or more
areas or meter groups.
c. Energy Density Report: Show energy usage in W/sq ft.
d. Energy Savings By Strategy Report: Show energy savings for any area broken
down by strategy (tuning, occupancy, daylighting, scheduled events, personal
control, and load shedding).
e. Activity Report: Show what activity has taken place over a period of time for one
or more areas. Activity includes occupant activities (e.g. wall controls being
pressed), building manager operation (e.g. controlling/changing areas using the
control and monitor tool), and device failures (e.g. keypads or ballasts that are not
responding).
1) Include shade related activities (e.g. automatic movements from Hyperion
automated shade algorithm, manual overrides from personal controls,
automatic overrides from sensors).
f. Failure Report: Shows which areas are currently reporting LED failures.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 23
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
g.
Shade Level Report: Shows the shade level for any shade group in the system over
any historical 24 hour period.
h. Shade Position Report: Shows the percentage of time shade groups in the system
are at each position.
i. Sensor Level Report: Shows the light level in footcandles of any photosensor in
the system.
j. Alert Activity Report: Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity
within the system.
k. Hyperion Automated Shade Control Activity Report: A single chart that displays
historical data regarding the position and performance of Hyperion automated
shades for a given shade group, which can be displayed over any single hour or 24
hour period, and includes the following:
1) Shade Level: Shows the shade level for any shade group in the system over
the time period, and also indicates the reason for shade movement.
2) Sensor Level: Shows the light level in footcandles over time for a given
shade group.
3) Sensor Threshold: Shows the sensor override thresholds in footcandles over
time for a given shade group.
4) Hyperion Mode: Shows the system mode transitions over time (Hyperion,
Dark Override, Bright Override, Manual Override, etc.).
11. Diagnostics: Allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in the
lighting control system. Devices to be listed with a reporting status of OK, missing, or
unknown.
12. Alerts and Alarms: Monitors the system for designated events/triggers and
automatically generates alerts according to configured response criteria.
a. Capable of monitoring for the following events/triggers:
1) A failed piece of equipment (e.g. ballast, control, sensor, etc.); alert cleared
when equipment is replaced.
2) A driver outage (for compatible drivers only); alert cleared when replaced.
3) Luminaires with operating hours in excess of designated time.
4) A load shed event; alert generated for beginning and end of trigger.
5) Energy usage higher than designated threshold target.
6) Potential light level condition discrepancies (daylight sensors not agreeing
with expected lighting status).
7) Potential sensor failures (Radio Window sensors that have not seen a change
in light level).
b. View alerts on a customized graphical floor plan.
c. Capable of generating alerts through visible changes in software or through email
messages.
d. Capable of customizing the frequency of alerts and providing notifications
immediately or through daily, weekly, or monthly summaries.
e. Capable of sending different alerts to different system users.
f. Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity within the system.
13. Administration:
a. Users: Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 24
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
edited.
1) Supports Active Directory (LDAP) tying user accounts to network accounts.
b. Area and feature access can be restricted based on login credentials with three
levels of access rights (Admin, Programmer, Controller) and customized access
levels available.
c. Publish Graphical Floor Plan: Allows admin user to publish new graphical floor
plan files, allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and
daylighting status.
d. Back-Up Project Database: Allows admin user to back up the project database that
holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad
programming, areas scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency
levels, night lights, and time clock.
e. Publish Project Database: Allows admin user to send a new project database to the
server and download the new configuration to the system. The project database
holds all the configuration information for the system, including keypad
programming, area scenes, daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency
levels, night lights, and time clock.
14. Favorite Buttons: Provide global scene control or modes of operation across the entire
system.
15. Provides control/monitoring of partition status to automatically reconfigure how the
space operates based on the partition's open/closed status.
D. Energy Savings Display Software:
1. Product: Lutron GreenGlance.
2. Provide software from a single manufacturer that can collect and display real-time and
historical energy savings data from all of the components in the lighting control system
or from the meters in the system.
3. Energy savings data to be accessible for display on computer terminal or user-supplied
display monitor via energy savings display software.
4. Software to be capable of displaying:
a. Current savings in percent and kW.
b. Historic energy savings in kWh saved, money saved, coal not burned, and carbon
dioxide not emitted.
c. Historical views in time periods of three hours, one day, one week, one month, and
one year.
d. Configurable energy usage baseline and user-defined working hours for energy
saving calculations.
e. Comparisons of historical periods (days, weeks, months, years).
f. Local weather conditions.
E.
Web Services Integration License:
1. Provide ability to communicate by means of XML web services
2. Web services integrator can monitor:
a. Area instantaneous power usage.
b. Area instantaneous power savings.
c. Area energy savings.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 25
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
4.
F.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
d. Area energy usage.
e. Area maximum power usage.
Initiate load shed event using Open ADR protocol in an auto-Demand-Response event
without additional interfaces or gateways.
Supports both push and pull for integration with third party systems and energy
dashboards.
Quantum Mobile Control and Programming Software License:
1. Allows mobile control and programming of Quantum system via an Apple iPad.
2. Provides users the ability to:
a. Control and monitor area lighting scenes, zones, and shade presets.
b. Easily identify zones and shade groups.
c. Edit area lighting scenes, shade presets, scene fade rates, and scene delay rates.
d. Restrict user access by area.
e. Restrict users from ability to make changes.
f. Historical logging of who made changes available in Q-Admin control and monitor
software.
3. Connects to Quantum system via Wi-Fi.
4. Can connect directly to processor or through computer (server) in the system.
G. Personal Web-Based Control Software:
1. Product: Lutron Personna PC.
2. Lighting Control: Allows the user to use a web browser on their personal PC, laptop, or
some mobile devices (supporting 1024 by 768 resolution) to control one or more lights
in their area.
a. The user may select between full on, full off, or a favorite light level.
b. The user may raise/lower the currently selected lighting level in the area.
3. Shade Control: Allows the user to use a web browser on their personal PC, laptop, or
some mobile devices (supporting 1024 by 768 resolution) to control one or more shades
in their area.
a. The user may select open, closed, or a favorite shade position.
b. The user may raise/lower a selected shade group in the area.
4. Supports up to 10,000 users.
5. Each user to have a login name and password sent from administrator via email when
user account created.
6. Supported Browsers: Microsoft Internet Explorer (versions 7 and higher), Mozilla
Firefox (versions 3 and higher), Apple Safari (versions 4 and higher), Google Chrome
(versions 8 and higher).
H. Automated Shade Control Software as required:
1. Product: Lutron Hyperion.
2. Objectives:
a. Uses open loop solar adaptive algorithm to minimize the penetration depth of
direct sunlight.
b. Optimizes energy savings from daylight.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 26
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provides manual override capability for occupants via wall-mounted keypad or
simple remote control.
d. Provides automatic override capability utilizing a local sensor in dark conditions or
when excessive brightness occurs.
e. Maximizes occupants’ connectivity with outdoors by optimizing view.
f. Provides diffuse daylight and minimizes direct sunlight in the space to reduce solar
heat gain and maximize occupant comfort in the space.
g. Reduces glare.
h. Shades along same facade to start, stop and track in unison to maintain a consistent
exterior aesthetic.
i. Provides optional presets to allow shades to align with architectural elements of the
facade.
j. Provides a preset, also referred to as visor position, to limit maximum amount of
light entering a space.
k. Provides configurable dark and bright override positions.
Hardware: Independent operation of solar tracking program through non-Windows
based operating system provided in one or more lighting management hubs.
Control Software:
a. Incorporates a solar tracking software that:
1) Calculates the sun's position in the sky relative to the building and then
calculates when shade movement is necessary by facade.
2) Calculates the position of the shade to limit direct sunlight penetration to a
predetermined limit.
b. Controlled using the following inputs for startup:
1) Building location.
2) Facade orientation.
3) Window dimensions.
4) Solar depth of penetration.
5) Number of shade movements per day.
6) Visor position of shades.
7) Optional presets that align shades with architectural features of the facade.
8) Light level thresholds for dark and bright override.
9) Shade position for dark and bright override.
10) Window position on wall.
c. Requires minimal long term maintenance and service. Does not require user to
make daily changes to programming or overall system functionality, unless desired
by CCF.
PC Graphic User Interface: Provides access to all adjustable parameters of solar depth
of penetration and number of shade movements per day.
Override:
a. Manual:
1) Temporary override of the control program capability through optional
manual keypads, remote controls, or end-user control software.
2) Keypads, remote controls, or end-user control software to be capable of
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 27
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
providing manual control of shades in a particular area.
3) Time of manual override to be programmable.
Automatic overrides achievable via Radio Window sensors or rooftop cloudy day
sensors:
1) Radio Window Sensors:
a) Product(s):
. Lutron Radio Window sensor; Model LRF2-SSM-XX (mullion mount
sensor pair).
. Lutron Radio Window sensor; Model LRF2-SSW-WH (window mount).
b) Monitors exterior light conditions and provides automatic override of system
on dark cloudy days or in the presence of shadows from neighboring
buildings and rooftop mechanical equipment.
c) Capable of detecting a light range of 0 to 10,000 footcandles (0 to 107,000
lux).
d) Sensors update the system with the light level conditions based on daylight
event changes, not periodic transmissions.
e) During dark conditions, shades to go to predetermined dark override position
to maximize view and available daylight.
f) Monitors exterior light conditions and provides automatic override of system
during excessive brightness.
g) During excessive bright conditions, shades to go to predetermined bright
override position to maximize occupant comfort.
h) Capable of having one or multiple sensors per facade for more localized
detection of exterior light conditions.
i) Capable of having one sensor control one shade group or multiple shade
groups.
j) Provides flexible grouping capabilities to achieve optimal hembar alignment
and daylight autonomy by allowing for any of the following three grouping
options in the software:
. Smart Adaptive Grouping: Shades in the same facade share sensor data
and intelligently adapt grouping to balance daylight autonomy, hembar
alignment, and maintain consistent shade positions for groups with
similar perceived daylight conditions.
. Always Aligned: Shades in the same facade share sensor data and
always maintain hembar alignment across the entire facade.
. Independent Grouping: Shades in the same facade operate independently
based on individual sensor data.
k) Software enables the ability to adjust thresholds, timeouts, and shade
movement frequency globally or per area to meet the unique preferences of
different individuals.
l) Sensor to not require external power packs, power wiring, or communication
wiring.
m) Light level readings of the two mullion mount sensors to be combined
together to act as one sensor.
n) Sensor to be easily mountable to mullion (mullion mount sensor pair) or
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 28
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
2)
a)
b)
c)
2.13
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
window (window mount) and can be easily removed and repositioned
without marring or damaging window surface.
Provides typical battery lifetime of 7 to 10 years when installed per
manufacturer instructions.
Communicates directly to compatible Lutron QS sensor module via Lutron
Clear Connect Technology to ensure reliable RF communications.
RF Frequency: 434 MHz.
RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving
device(s).
Intuitive test mode to provide instant system verification of associated shades
and programmed visor position.
Rooftop Cloudy Day Sensors:
Product: Lutron Cloudy Day Sensor; Model QS-CES-R.
Provides automatic override of system on dark cloudy days.
During dark conditions, shades to go to predetermined visor position to
maximize view and available daylight.
CONTROL STATIONS
A. Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B.
Wired Control Stations:
1. General Requirements:
a. Power: Class 2 (low voltage).
b. UL listed.
c. Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
d. Borders, logos, and graduations to use laser engraving or silk-screened graphic
process that chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by
scratching and cleaning.
e. Finish: As specified for wall controls in "Device Finishes" under DIGITALNETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Multi-Scene Wired Control:
a. General Requirements:
1) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.
2) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
3) Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.
4) Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication.
5) Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the
drawings.
6) Software Configuration:
a) Customizable control station device button functionality:
. Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action.
. Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and
defined action on release.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 29
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
.
b.
c.
Buttons can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state
variable such as time of day or partition status.
. Buttons can be programmed to perform automatic sequence of defined
actions.
. Capable of deactivating select keypads to prevent accidental changes to
light levels.
. Buttons can be programmed for raise/lower of defined loads.
. Buttons can be programmed to toggle defined set of loads on/off.
7) Status LEDs:
a) Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.
b) LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the
button press was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if the button press
was not processed.
c) Support logic that defines when LED is illuminated:
. Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels).
. Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
. Pathway logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
. Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).
Wired Keypads:
1) Style: [per project rqmts].
2) Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link.
3) Mounting: Wallbox or low-voltage mounting bracket; provide wall plates
with concealed mounting hardware.
4) Button/Engraving Backlighting:
a) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide
readability under all light conditions.
b) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software.
5) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration,
and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits.
6) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit
which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both
momentary and maintained contact closures.
7) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire
reversals and shorts.
8) Provide integral infrared receiver for personal control
Wired Keypads; Lutron Architrave QS Keypads:
1) Mounting: Wallbox; Lutron Architrave Wallbox; provide wall plates with
concealed mounting hardware.
2) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration,
and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits.
3) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit
which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both
momentary and maintained contact closures.
4) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 30
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
reversals and shorts.
d. Wired Keypads; Lutron Signature Series QS Keypads:
1) Mounting: Wallbox; Lutron Signature Series Wallbox; provide wall plates
with concealed mounting hardware.
2) Button/Engraving Backlighting:
a) Utilize backlighting for buttons and associated engraving to provide
readability under all light conditions.
b) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software.
3) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color, configuration,
and engraving using field-changeable replacement kits.
4) Contact Closure Interface: Provide two contact closure inputs on back of unit
which provide independent functions from front buttons; accepts both
momentary and maintained contact closures.
5) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire
reversals and shorts.
e. Wired Keypads; Lutron QS Wired Palladium Wallstations:
1) Style: Architectural Style
2) Mounting: Wallbox; provide wall plates with concealed mounting hardware.
3) Buttons and Faceplate:
a) Buttons to be greater than 0.65 inch (16.5 mm) in height to provide large
target area for ease of use and actuation.
b) Front of buttons to be flush with faceplate.
c) Buttons and faceplate to be of the same material and finish (e.g.
plastic/plastic, glass/glass, metal/metal).
d) Buttons to depress and provide tactile feedback of a successful button push.
Controls utilizing capacitive or resistive touch technology are not acceptable.
e) Gaps to be less than 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) between buttons and less than
0.15 inch (3.8 mm) between buttons and faceplate.
4) Button/Engraving Backlighting:
a) Backlighting to be visible through engraved text to provide clear readability
in a variety of lighting conditions.
b) Indicate active scene through the intensity of the backlighting (brighter
backlit text indicates the active state).
c) Backlight intensity adjustable via programming software; capable of
dynamic adjustment during usage based on conditional logic (time of day,
button press, etc.).
5) Design keypads to allow field-customization of button color and engraving
using field-changeable replacement kits.
6) Terminal block inputs to be over-voltage and miswire-protected against wire
reversals and shorts.
Single-Scene or Zoned Wired Control:
a. Product: Lutron Pico Wired Control.
b. Turn an individual fixture or group of fixtures on and off.
c. Raise and lower light levels.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 31
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
5.
6.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
d. Recall favorite light levels.
Wired Keyswitch:
a. Product: Lutron QS Keyswitch.
b. Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.
c. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link.
d. Functionality:
1) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
2) Requires key insertion to activate actions.
e. Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the
drawings.
f. Software Configuration:
1) Customizable control station device button functionality:
a) Key positions can be programmed to perform single defined action.
b) Key positions can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state
variable such as time of day or partition status.
Single Touch Slider Control:
a. Product: Lutron GrafikT QS Slider.
b. Allows control of any single lighting zone in the system.
c. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link.
d. Switch Control: Single-touch LED bar for on/off operation.
e. Dimmer Control: Single touch LED bar with one portion of bar for on/off
operation and one portion for dimmer adjustment.
1) Single touch of light level adjustment control portion of LED bar
raises/lowers lights, with new level becoming the current preset level.
2) When off, single touch of on/off control portion of LED bar raises lights to
preset level.
3) When on, single touch of on/off control portion of LED bar initiates long fade
to off.
4) Provides audible feedback for touch control confirmation.
5) LED bar indicates on/off status and current light level, and functions as
locator light when dimmer is off.
6) Provides for customized adjustment of dimmer functions via programming
software:
a) High/low end trims.
b) LED brightness.
c) Sound on/off.
d) Off fade time.
e) On fade time.
f) Preset lock capability.
Analog Slider Control:
a. Product: Lutron QS Slider Control.
b. Allows control of any lighting zone in the system via intuitive analog slider
control.
c. Communications: Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communications link.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 32
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
C.
2.14
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Available in 1 to 16 zone configurations.
Available with or without a take command switch to activate the slider scene.
Optional keypad ganging.
Slider zones can be chained in partitioned spaces.
Engrave keypads with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the
drawings.
Functionality:
1) Full range dimming of individual zones or groups of zones.
2) Zone levels indicated by slider position.
3) Integrates with multi-scene wired control.
Infrared Handheld Controls:
1. Product(s):
a. Four-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter; Lutron Model GRX-IT-WH: Operates
up to 50 feet (15 m) line-of-sight to receiver.
b. Single-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter; Lutron Model C-FLRC-WH: Operates
up to 12 feet (3.7 m) line-of-sight to receiver.
2. Quantity: To be determined; provide allowance for [per project rqmts] control(s).
3. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting control;
compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter.
4. Learnable by other variable frequency remote controls.
LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES
A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B.
Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.
C.
UL listed.
D. Contact Closure Interface:
1. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
2. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.
3. Contact closure can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such
as time of day or partition status.
E.
Wallbox Input Closure Interface:
1. Mounts in wallbox behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight
contact closure inputs.
2. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
F.
RS232 and Ethernet Interface:
1. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 33
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
touchscreens, etc.
Provide control of:
a. Light scene selections.
b. Fine-tuning of light scene levels with raise/lower.
c. Shade group presets.
d. Fine-tuning of shade preset levels with raise/lower.
e. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.
Provide status monitoring of:
a. Light scene status.
b. Shade group status.
c. Wall station button presses and releases.
d. Wall station LEDs.
Provide ability to send custom output strings.
G. DMX Interface:
1. Provide ability to:
a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel.
b. Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color
control.
c. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel.
d. Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade.
e. Automatically sequence through a variety of colors.
f. Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit.
H. Sensor Modules:
1. Products:
a. Sensor module with both wired and wireless inputs; Lutron Model QSM2-4W-C.
b. Sensor module with wired inputs only; Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C.
c. Sensor module with wireless inputs only; Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C.
2. Wired Modules:
a. Provide wired inputs for:
1) Occupancy sensors.
2) Daylight sensors.
3) IR receivers for personal control.
4) Digital wall stations.
3. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by
compatible devices.
2.15
WIRED SENSORS
A. Wired Occupancy Sensors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Connects directly to compatible ballasts and modules without the need of a power
pack or other interface.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 34
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Turns off or reduces lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a
room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space.
Accommodates all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and
habits.
Comply with UL 94.
Self-Adaptive Sensors: Continually adjusts sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal
lighting control for any use of the space; furnished with field-adjustable controls
for time delay and sensitivity to override any adaptive features.
Provide capability to:
1) Add additional timeout system-wide without need to make local adjustment
on sensor.
2) Group multiple sensors.
Power Failure Memory: Settings and learned parameters to be saved in nonvolatile memory and not lost should power be interrupted and subsequently
restored.
Furnished with all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.
Class 2 devices.
Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket.
Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide swivel-mount base.
Color: White.
B.
Infrared Receivers:
1. Product: Lutron Model EC-IR-WH.
2. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.
3. Can be replaced without reprogramming.
4. 360 degree reception of wireless infrared remote controls.
5. Immediate local LED response upon reception of handheld transmitter communication.
6. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles.
7. Constructed via sonic welding.
8. Color: White.
C.
Wired Daylight Sensors:
1. Digital Interior Daylight Sensor:
a. Product: Lutron Model EC-DIR-WH.
b. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.
c. Can be replaced without reprogramming.
d. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.
e. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C).
f. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture
lighting and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.
g. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 footcandles.
h. Integral IR receiver for personal control.
i. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 35
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
j. Constructed via sonic welding.
k. Color: White.
Daylight Control Package:
a. Product: Lutron CES Series (Lutron CES Analog Sensor, LC8 Controller, and
Power Pack).
b. Controller:
1) Product: Lutron Model LC8.
2) Automatically switches a dry contact according to changes in ambient light
levels.
3) Fully adjustable separate high and low setpoints, with an adjustable dead band
between set points to prevent unwanted cycling.
4) Input time delay to prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level
fluctuations.
5) Signal/setpoint and relay status indication.
6) Sensor calibration input.
c. Sensors:
1) Class 2, three-wire analog devices.
2) Provision for zero or offset based signal.
3) Indoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/I: With fresnel lens and 60 degree
cone of response; sensor range of 0 to 750 footcandles.
4) Outdoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/O: Weatherproof, with hood over
aperture to shield sensor from direct sunlight; sensor range of 0 to 750
footcandles.
5) Atrium Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/A: With translucent dome and 180
degree field of view; sensor range of 2 to 2,500 footcandles.
6) Skylight Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/S: With translucent dome and
180 degree field of view; sensor range of 10 to 7,500 footcandles.
D. Infrared Partition Sensors:
1. Product: Lutron Model GRX-IRPS-WH.
2. Provide contact closure based on status of the partition wall (open/close) enabling
automatic linking of controls.
2.16
ACCESSORIES
A. Emergency Lighting Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model LUT-ELI.
2. Provides total system listing to UL 924 when used with lighting control system.
3. Senses all three phases of building power.
4. Provides an output to power panels or digital ballast interfaces if power on any phase
fails and sends all lights controlled by these devices to an emergency light level setting;
100 percent intensity. Lights to return to their previous intensities when normal power
is restored.
5. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 36
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
2.17
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Provide power supplies as indicated or as required to power system devices and accessories.
1. Product(s):
a. Junction box-mounted power supply for shades, keypads, and accessories, and for
providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model
QSPS-J-1-50; with miswire and thermal protection.
b. Plug-in power supply for shades, drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories,
and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron
Model QSPS-P1-1-50; with miswire protection; powered from standard receptacle
using cord 6 feet (1.8 m) in length.
c. Ten output power supply panel for shades, drapery drive units, keypads and
accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication
link; Lutron Model QSPS-P1-10-60.
d. Power supply for keypads and accessories (not for shades/window treatments), and
for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model
QSPS-DH-1-75.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Testing; Lutron Standard Factory Testing:
1. Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling
is not acceptable.
2. Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all LED drivers.
3. Perform factory audit burn-in of all dimming assemblies and panels at 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C) at full load for two hours.
B.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables” and Section 260523 “Control Voltage Electrical Cables”.
B.
Grounding: Comply with Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems”.
C.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Provide complete installation of System in accordance with Contract Documents.
E.
Provide dedicated network between Q-Manager computer and Quantum Lighting
Management Panels.
F.
Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any
additional equipment required to provide control intent.
G. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 37
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
H. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.
3.2
I.
Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources;
ceiling mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors shall not have direct view of
luminaires.
J.
Systems Integration:
1. Equipment Integration Meeting Visit
a. Cleveland Clinic Facility Representative to coordinate meeting between Cleveland
Clinic, Lighting Control System Manufacturer and other related equipment
manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.
STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING
A. Startup and Programming
1. Provide factory certified field service engineer to make minimum of three site visits to
ensure proper System installation and operation under following parameters:
a. Qualifications for factory certified field service engineer:
1) Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.
2) Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the System installed.
b. Make first visit prior to installation of wiring. Review:
1) Low voltage wiring requirements.
2) Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring.
3) Wire labeling.
4) Lighting Management Panel locations and installations.
5) Control locations.
6) Computer jack locations.
7) Load circuit wiring.
8) Network wiring requirements.
9) Connections to other equipment.
10) Installer responsibilities.
11) Power Panel locations.
c. Make second visit upon completion of installation of Network Lighting Control
System:
1) Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits.
2) Verify connection and location of controls.
3) Energize Lighting Management Panels and download System data program.
4) Address devices.
5) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.
6) Download System panel data to dimming/switching panels
7) Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of bypass jumpers.
8) Verify System operation control by control.
9) Verify proper operation of manufacturers interfacing equipment.
10) Verify proper operation of manufacturers supplied PC and installed programs.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 38
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
B.
3.3
3.5
Tech Support
1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.4
11) Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and
occupant sensors.
12) Initial calibration of sensors.
13) Obtain sign-off on System functions.
d. Make third visit to demonstrate and educate Cleveland Clinic representative on
System capabilities, operation and maintenance.
Startup
a. Q-Admin configuration
1) Naming and association of areas and lighting zones.
b. After Hours Start-up if required.
1) Provide factory certified Field Service Engineer to perform manufacturer’s
start-up procedures outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday,
7a.m. to 5 p.m.)
Manufacturer Services
1. Aim and Focus Visit
a. Cleveland Clinic Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting
Control System Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required
lighting adjustments to the System for conformance with the Lighting Design
Consultant’s original design intent.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Training Visit
1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide 2 days additional on-site System
training to site personnel.
B.
On-Site Walkthrough
1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field Service
Engineer to demonstrate system functionality to the Commissioning Agent.
2.
MAINTENANCE
A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United
States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.
B.
Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual
training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.
END OF SECTION 260943
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 39
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS_2015
260943 - 40
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 261116 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes indoor and outdoor secondary unit substations, each consisting of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Primary incoming section.
Transformer.
Secondary distribution section.
Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Cables" for requirements of terminating cables in
incoming section of substation.
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for communication
features of power distribution system devices.
Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear" for metering and instrument
transformers.
Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and
communication equipment located in the secondary section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Dimensioned plans and elevations showing major components and features.
One-line diagram.
List of materials.
Nameplate legends.
Size and number of bus bars and current rating for each bus, including mains and
branches of phase, neutral, and ground buses.
Short-time and short-circuit current ratings of secondary unit substations and
components.
Ratings of individual protective devices.
C.
Time-Current Characteristic Curves: For overcurrent protective devices.
D.
Primary Fuses: Submit recommendations and size calculations.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Dimensioned concrete base, outline of secondary unit substation, conduit entries, and
ground rod locations.
Location of structural supports for structure-supported raceways [and seismic bracing].
Location of lighting fixtures, sprinkler piping and heads, ducts, and diffusers.
[Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer
assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a’ or “b” below]
a.
b.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.]
C.
Product Certificates: For secondary unit substations, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Material Test Reports: For secondary unit substations.
E.
Factory test reports.
F.
Field quality-control test reports.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For secondary unit substations and accessories to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1.
Spare fuses: Six of each type and rating of fuse and fusible device used. Include spares
for the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Primary disconnect fuses.
Potential transformer fuses.
Control power fuses.
Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
Touchup Paint: Three half-pint containers of paint matching enclosure's exterior finish.
Primary Switch Contact Lubricant: One container(s).
One set(s) of spare mounting gaskets for bushings, handholes, and the gasket between
relief cover and flange of pressure relief device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of secondary
unit substations and are based on the specific system indicated.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C2.
E.
Comply with IEEE C37.121.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
G.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
H.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Guidelines.
1.9
Obtain secondary unit substation through one source from a single
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver in shipping splits in sizes that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Coordinate delivery of secondary unit substations to allow movement into designated space.
C.
Store secondary unit substation components so condensation will not form on or in units.
Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Handle secondary unit substation components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Use factory-installed lifting provisions.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B.
Interruption of Existing electric Service:
[DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
C.
Products Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
secondary unit substations including clearances between substations and adjacent surfaces and
other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions, except for the following:
[EDIT FOR PROJECT CONDITIONS]
1.
Altitudes above 3300 feet (1000 m).
2.
Exposure to hot and humid climate.
3.
Exposure to seismic shock or to abnormal vibration, shock, or tilting.
4.
Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures.
5.
Unusual transportation or storage conditions.
6.
Unusual grounding resistance conditions.
7.
Unusual space limitations.
1.11
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of secondary unit substations with other construction that
penetrates floors and ceilings, or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, and fire-suppression-system components.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
ABB Control, Inc. (Transformers only)
Cooper Industries, Inc.; Cooper Power Systems Division. (Transformers only)
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
GE Electrical Distribution & Control.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Indoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly.
B.
Outdoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly.
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Weatherproof, listed for installation outdoors, complying with IEEE C37.20.1.
Aisle-less Construction: Full-height doors in front of basic weatherproof equipment.
Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color, including under
surfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.
INCOMING SECTION
A.
Primary Incoming Section: Enclosed, air-interrupter, [dual primary] [primary] switch.
1.
Description: For metal-enclosed, fused, air interrupter switches comply with Division 26
Section 261300 “Medium Voltage Switchgear”
2.
Three pole, single throw, dead front, metal enclosed, with manual stored energy operator,
with fuses mounted on a single frame, complying with IEEE C37.20.3.
Key interlocking system to prevent fuse access door from being opened unless switch is
open. Additionally, interlock air-interrupter switch with transformer secondary main
circuit breaker, preventing switch from being opened or closed unless secondary main
circuit breaker is open.
3.
B.
Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution class; metal-oxide-varistor type, with
ratings as indicated, connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any
disconnecting device.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER SECTION
A.
2.5
Description: For liquid-filled, 2-winding, secondary unit substation transformers comply with
Division 26 Section 261200 “Medium Voltage Transformers”.
SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION SECTION
A.
2.6
Secondary Distribution: Low-voltage switchgear as specified in Division 26 Section 262300
"Low-Voltage Switchgear."
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.
B.
Connect remote monitoring communication module to Cleveland Clinic’s data network through
appropriate network interface unit to the Building Automation System.
C.
The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the
switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily
accessible terminal blocks.
2.7
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.8
Compartment Nameplates:
Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each
compartment, mounted with stainless steel screws. Nameplates and label products are specified
in Division 26 Section 260533 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for
components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90. Conduct switchgear and
switchboard tests according to ANSI C37.51.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for secondary unit
substations and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:
1.
Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will
have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions for secondary unit
substation installation.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance
shall be 5 ohms at secondary unit substation location.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install secondary unit substations in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and
as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.
Anchor secondary unit substations to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written
instructions and requirements in Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems".
2.
[In seismic areas, secondary unit substation shall be adequately anchored and
braced per Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems."]
3.
Interior Location: Mount secondary unit substations on concrete bases of dimensions
indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100-mm) larger in both directions than supported
unit and 4 inches (100-mm) high with chamfered edges.
a.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement
as specified in Division 03 Sections.
b.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
c.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for anchoring equipment to the concrete base.
d.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
Exterior Location. Mount secondary unit substations on concrete slabs. Unless otherwise
indicated, the slab shall be at least 8 inches (200mm) thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inch
(150 by 150-mm) No. 6 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches (100-mm) from the top of the
slab. Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch (150-mm) thick, well-compacted gravel base. The
top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches (100-mm) above the finished
grade. Edges shall be chamfered. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8
inches (200-mm) beyond the equipment.
a.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement
as specified in Division 03 Sections.
4.
B.
Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions and NFPA 70.
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for secondary unit substations,
including key interlocking, control sequences, elementary single-line diagram, and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount
on front of secondary unit substation.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
C.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and
values.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
After completing equipment installation and before energizing, inspect unit components.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish. Vacuum interiors of secondary unit substation sections, do not use compressed
air.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in
field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test according to
NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
After installing secondary unit substation but before primary is energized, verify that
grounding system at the substation tested at the specified value or less.
Perform phasing check on double-ended switchgear to insure correct bus phasing from
each source.
After installing secondary unit substation and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges according to results in Division 26 Section
"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." Post a durable copy of the "as-left"
settings and fuse ratings in a convenient location within the switchgear
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
C.
3.7
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each unit substation, include primary, transformer, and
distribution sections. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
1.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
2.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies equipment checked
and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.
FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A.
Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: After Substantial Completion, if requested by Cleveland
Clinic, but not more than six months after Final Acceptance, perform the following voltage
monitoring:
1.
2.
During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Cleveland Clinic, perform seven
days of three-phase voltage recording at the outgoing section of each secondary unit
substation. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any
phase voltage from the nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during the
test period, is unacceptable.
Corrective Action: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective
action, as appropriate:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
B.
3.8
Adjust transformer taps.
Rebalance loads.
Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.
Retests: Repeat monitoring, after corrective action has been performed, until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Report: Prepare a written report covering monitoring performed and corrective action
taken.
Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear."
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. Comply with Division 01 requirements.
END OF SECTION 261116
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
261116 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 261200 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS _ revised October, 2015
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Liquid-filled distribution and power transformers that form a part of unit substation
assemblies.
Dry type distribution and power transformers that form a part of unit substation
assemblies.
Stand Alone, Pad-mounted, Liquid-filled transformers.
Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for requirements for transformers that
form a part of a unit substation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and performance
for each type and size of transformer indicated.
B.
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for insulating fluid.
C.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up location.
Dimensioned concrete base, outline of transformer, and required clearances.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
B.
Ground rod and grounding cable locations.
[Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT
CONDITIONS] Submit certification that transformer assembly and components will
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a’ or ‘b” below]
a.
b.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.]
C.
Source quality-control test reports.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
Follow-up service reports.
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options:
Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
transformers and are based on the specific system indicated.
1.
Product Selection for Restricted Spaces: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other
items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C2.
D.
Liquid filled: Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
E.
Dry type: Comply with IEEE C57.12.01, ANSI C57.21.50, ANSI C57.12.51, IEEE C57.12.56,
IEEE C57.12.91, and IEEE C57.94.
F.
Oil or dry type: IEEE C57.12.70 and IEEE C57.12.80.
G.
Comply with NFPA 70.
H.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
I.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Store transformers protected from weather and so condensation will not form on or in units.
Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions except for the following:
[EDIT FOR PROJECT CONDITIONS]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.10
Exposure to significant solar radiation.
Altitudes above 3300 feet (1000 m).
Exposure to fumes, vapors, or dust.
Exposure to explosive environments.
Exposure to hot and humid climate or to excessive moisture, including steam, salt spray,
and dripping water.
Exposure to seismic shock or to abnormal vibration, shock, or tilting.
Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures.
Unusual transportation or storage conditions.
Unusual grounding-resistance conditions.
Unusual space limitations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate
installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage
transformers except those directly associated with transformers.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
ABB.
Cooper Industries; Cooper Power Systems Division.
Cutler-Hammer.
GE Electrical Distribution & Control.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
LIQUID-FILLED DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS
A.
Description: IEEE C57.12.00 and UL 1062, liquid-filled, 2-winding transformers installed
indoors, typically as part of a unit substation assembly.
B.
Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, silicone-based dielectric and UL listed as complying with
NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to
ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be FM approved and have low toxicity and be nonhazardous.
C.
Insulation Temperature Rise: 65/55 deg C, based on an average ambient temperature of 30
deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Insulation system shall
be rated to continuously allow an additional 12 percent kilovolt-ampere output, at 65 deg C
temperature rise, without decreasing rated transformer life.
D.
High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper. Insulation between layers of the
windings shall be by thermally set insulating paper or equal.
E.
Basic Impulse Level: [60 for 5 kV] [95 for 15 kV].
F.
Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary
voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator
and padlock hasp.
G.
Cooling System: Class OA/FA, self-cooled, and with forced-air-cooled rating. Cooling
systems shall include auxiliary cooling equipment, automatic controls, and status indicating
lights.
H.
Sound level may not exceed sound levels listed in NEMA TR 1, without fans operating.
I.
Impedance: +/- 7-1/2%.
J.
Accessories: Grounding pads, lifting lugs, and provisions for jacking under base. Transformers
shall have a steel base and frame allowing use of pipe rollers in any direction, and an insulated,
low-voltage, neutral bushing with removable ground strap. Include the following additional
accessories:
1.
Liquid-level gage.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Pressure-vacuum gage.
Liquid temperature indicator.
Drain and filter valves.
Pressure relief device.
Additional nameplate with FM approval data.
DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS
A.
Description: NEMA and ANSI C57 compliant and UL 1062, 2-winding transformers installed
indoors, typically as part of a unit substation assembly. UL labeled.
B.
Primary terminations shall be designed for close coupling to [a metal enclosed air load break
switch section] [an air terminal chamber provided with the transformer]. Secondary
terminations shall be designed for close coupling to [a switchgear section] [a switchboard
section].
C.
Cores shall be manufactured from non-aging, cold rolled, high permeability grain oriented
silicone steel.
D.
High and Low Voltage windings shall be Copper.
E.
Insulating System: Coils shall be insulated with 220º C Class H Nomex® insulation system.
Environmental protection shall be provided by vacuum pressure impregnation with polyester
resin (VPI).
F.
Insulation Temperature Rise: 115º C, based on an average ambient temperature of 30º C over
24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40º C. Insulation system shall be rated to
allow the transformer to be overloaded to the 150º C temperature rise, without decreasing rated
transformer life.
G.
Basic Impulse Level: [60 for 5 kV] [95 for 15 kV].
H.
Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5% taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary
voltage; accessible by removing the enclosure panels.
I.
Cooling System: Class OA/FA, self-cooled, and with forced-air-cooled rating. Fan cooling
package shall be provided and include auxiliary cooling equipment, automatic controls, digital
winding temperature and status indicating lights.
J.
Heavy gauge, sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure, ventilated, with removable panels for access to
taps. The complete case shall be capable of being knocked down to reduce size and weight for
rigging. Rubber vibration isolation pads shall be installed by the manufacturer between the core
and coil and the enclosure. Finish: manufacturer’s standard ANSI 61 paint finish.
K.
Sound level may not exceed sound levels listed in NEMA TR 1, without fans operating.
L.
Impedance: +/- 7-1/2%.
M.
Accessories: Grounding pads, lifting lugs, and provisions for jacking under base. Transformers
shall have a steel base and frame allowing use of pipe rollers in any direction, and an insulated,
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
low-voltage, neutral bushing with removable ground strap. Include the following additional
accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Alarm contacts for gages and thermometer listed above.
Ventilation grilles.
Provisions for rolling.
Core ground strap.
Diagrammatic nameplate.
PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS
A.
Description: ANSI C57.12.13, ANSI C57.12.26, IEEE C57.12.00, for pad-mounted, 2-winding
transformers, stainless-steel tank base, cabinet, and sills, typically installed outdoors.
B.
Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, silicone-based dielectric and UL listed as complying with
NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to
ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be FM approved and have low toxicity and be nonhazardous.
C.
Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C when operated at rated kVA output in a 40 deg C
ambient temperature. Transformer shall be rated to operate at rated kilovolt ampere in an
average ambient temperature of 30 deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature
of 40 deg C without loss of service life expectancy.
D.
High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper. Insulation between layers of the
windings shall be by thermally set insulating paper or equal.
E.
Basic Impulse Level: [60 for 5 kV] [95 for 15 kV].
F.
Impedance: +/- 7-1/2%.
G.
Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high voltage;
with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and
padlock hasp.
H.
High-Voltage Switch: Separately mounted [5 kV] [15 kV] metal-enclosed fused interrupter
switch complying with Section 261300.
I.
Surge Arresters: Distribution class, one for each primary phase; complying with IEEE C62.11
and NEMA LA 1; support from tank wall within high-voltage compartment.
J.
High-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Live front with externally clamped, wet process,
porcelain bushings and cable connectors suitable for terminating primary cable.
K.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Drain Valve: 1 inch (25 mm), with sampling device.
Dial-type thermometer.
Liquid-level gage.
1 inch upper filter press and filling plug.
Pressure-vacuum gage.
Pressure Relief Device: Self-sealing with an indicator.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Mounting provisions for low-voltage current transformers. [DELETE IF NOT
REQUIRED]
Mounting provisions for low-voltage potential transformers. [DELETE IF NOT
REQUIRED]
Alarm contacts for gages and thermometer listed above.
Additional nameplate with FM approval data.
ANSI tank grounding provisions shall be furnished in both compartments.
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.6
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted
with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26
Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for
components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90, for liquid filled
transformers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage
transformers.
B.
Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:
1.
2.
Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.
Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will
have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance
shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install pad mounted transformers on concrete bases designed by the Structural Engineer.
B.
Install indoor transformers on 4-inch (100-mm) high concrete housekeeping pads.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Anchor transformers to concrete pads according to manufacturer's written instructions
[and seismic codes at Project], and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems."
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 03 Sections.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete pad to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of pad.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts, for supported equipment, that extend through concrete
pad and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions and NFPA 70.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
C.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and
values.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that grounding
system at substation is tested at specified value or less.
After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A.
Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage Switchgear."
END OF SECTION 261200
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261200 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 261300 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear and metal-clad, circuit-breaker
switchgear with the following optional components, features, and accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.3
Copper, silver-plated main bus at connection points.
Communication modules.
Analog instruments.
Protective Relays and current transformers.
Surge arresters.
Provisions for future devices.
Fungus proofing.
Control battery system.
Mimic bus.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing
communication and metering.
2.
Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for medium voltage fused interrupter
switchgear used as incoming primary equipment.
3.
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices and protective relays.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
GFCI: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1.
2.
Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for
individual interrupter switches and circuit breakers.
Time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices, including circuitbreaker relay trip devices and fusible devices.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Show method of field assembly and location and size of
each field connection. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,
and weights of each assembled section.
Drawing of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for
conduits and indicating space available for cable terminations.
Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts.
Current ratings of buses.
Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly.
Nameplate legends.
Mimic-bus diagram.
Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
[Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.]
Wiring Diagrams: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Power, signal, and control wiring.
Three-line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits showing device
terminal numbers and internal diagrams.
Schematic control diagrams.
Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment.
Schematic diagrams showing connections to remote devices including power
monitoring and control devices.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,
and required area above and around switchgear where piping and ducts are prohibited. Show
switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Identify field
measurements.
D.
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color
charts showing colors available for mimic bus.
E.
[Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear,
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a” or “b” below]
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
2.
3.
4.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.]
F.
Source quality-control test reports.
G.
Field quality-control test reports.
H.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:
1.
2.
1.5
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of switchgear and associated components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear
and are based on the specific system indicated.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C2.
E.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
F.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.
B.
Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C.
If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent
condensation.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere
ratings for the following conditions:
1.
2.
Ambient temperature not exceeding [122 deg F (50 deg C)] [140 deg F (60 deg C)].
Altitude of <Insert elevation> above sea level.
B.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide
pathway for moving switchgear into place.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Cleveland Clinic’s written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for
workspace and equipment access doors and panels.
C.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.9
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for future transformers, control
power circuits, and fusible devices.
Circuit breaker: fully equipped spare MV circuit breaker crated and labeled.
Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for switchgear test,
inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuse-handling tool.
Extension rails, lifting device, transport dolly or mobile lift, and all other items necessary
to remove circuit breaker from housing and transport to remote location.
Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected
positions, and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of circuit breaker without
removal from switchgear.
Remote operated, motor driven, racking device.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description: Factory assembled and tested.
B.
Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system.
C.
System Voltage: [4.16 kV nominal; 4.76 kV maximum] [7.2 kV nominal; 15 kV maximum]
[13.8 kV nominal; 15 kV maximum] [34.5 kV nominal; 38 kV maximum].
2.3
METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton Corporation Electrical Group “MVS”, or equal by:
2.
General Electric.
3.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
B.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.3.
C.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.7.
D.
Design Level of Available-Source Fault Current: Integrated short-circuit rating consistent with
value of fault current indicated.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
E.
Ratings: Comply with standard ratings designated in IEEE C37.20.3 for maximum-rated
voltage specified.
1.
F.
Main-Bus Rating: <insert rating> A, continuous.
Interrupter Switches: Stationary, 3-pole, gang-operated, and suitable for application at
maximum short-circuit rating of integrated switchgear assembly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
G.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Rating: [600] [1200]-A continuous duty and load break.
Duty-Cycle, Fault Closing: [25,000] [40,000] asymmetrical A.
Switch Action: No external arc and no significant quantities of ionized gas released into
the enclosure.
Switch Construction: Supported entirely by interior framework of structure, with copper
switchblades and stored-energy operating mechanism.
The speed of opening and closing the switch shall be independent of the operator, and it
shall be impossible to “tease” the switch into any intermediate position under normal
operation.
A maintenance provision for slow closing the switch to check switch blade engagement
and slow opening the switch to check operation of the arc interrupting contacts.
Phase Barriers: Full length of switchblades and fuses for each pole; designed for easy
removal; allow visual inspection of switch components if barrier is in place.
Protective Shields: Cover live components and terminals.
Fuses: De-energized if switch is open.
Surge Arrestors on load side of fuse.
Ground Ball Studs shall be provided on all phase, neutral and ground bus to allow for
apparatus grounding clamps during maintenance.
Mechanical Interlock: Prevent opening switch compartment door unless switchblades are open,
and prevent closing switch if door is open.
1.
Green-OPEN, Red-CLOSED switch position indicators (FLAGS) with the words “Open”
and “Closed” in French, Spanish and English.
H.
Network Communications Equipment: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems with the following features:
1.
The communication system network shall be as described in Section 260913.
2.
Each load interrupter switch position (open and closed), where shown, shall communicate
via an addressable relay. This relay shall communicate over the network. The relay shall
monitor an auxiliary switch contact that monitors the primary switch position and shall be
rated for the application. Each relay shall have a unique address so that it is possible to
“call up” and “read” each load interrupter switch’s position from a host computer.
3.
A blown high voltage fuse condition on each set of three (3) fuses shall be monitored by
an addressable relay. Any blown fuse operation shall be communicated immediately over
the network via the monitoring addressable relay. Each relay shall have a unique address
so that it is possible to “call up” and “read” a fuse blown operation for a set of fuses with
the communication system.
I.
Window: Minimum 8-inch x 16-inch high-impact viewing window that permits full view of the
position of all three switch blades through the closed door. The window shall not be more than
58-inches above the switch pad level to allow ease of inspection.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
J.
Key Interlocks: Arranged for interlocking schemes indicated.
K.
Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each switch to secure its
enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism. Provisions shall be included for
padlocking in the open or closed position.
L.
Power Fuses: Comply with the following and with applicable requirements in NEMA SG 2:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Indicator: Integral with each fuse to indicate when it has blown.
Mounting: Positively held in position with provision for easy removal and replacement
from front without special tools.
Current-Limiting, E-rated Fuses: Full-range, fast-replaceable, current-limiting type rated
for not less than 50-kA RMS symmetrical current-interrupting capacity that will operate
without explosive noise or expulsion of gas, vapor, or foreign matter from tube.
Spares: Include three fuses in use and three spare fuses in storage clips in each switch
METAL-CLAD, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton Corporation Electrical Group “VAC-CLAD” or equal by:
2.
General Electric Distribution & Control.
3.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
B.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.2.
C.
Comply with IEEE C37.20.7.
D.
SCA Rating: [25] [40] [50] [63] kA.
E.
Ratings: Comply with IEEE C37.04.
1.
F.
Main-Bus Rating: <INSERT RATING> A, continuous.
Circuit Breakers: Three-pole, single-throw, electrically operated, drawout-mounting units using
three individual, vacuum-sealed interrupter modules and including the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Designed to operate at rated voltage to interrupt fault current within its rating within three
cycles of trip initiation. For systems with X/R ratio of 17 or less, transient voltage during
interruption shall not exceed twice the rated line-to-ground voltage of the system. K=1
rated.
Contact-Wear Indicator: Readily accessible to field maintenance personnel.
Spare contacts: six each Type A and Type B.
Protective relays and current transformers as shown on Drawings.
a.
Protective relays shall be Schweitzer type______.
Interchangeability: Circuit breakers are interchangeable with vacuum circuit breakers of
same current and interrupting ratings.
Closed door drawout mechanism.
Operating Mechanism: Electrically charged, mechanically and electrically trip-free,
stored-energy operated.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
Closing speed of moving contacts to be independent of both control and operator.
Design mechanism to permit manual charging and slow closing of contacts for
inspection or adjustment.
1)
c.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Control Power: 125 -V dc for closing and tripping.
Provide shunt trip capability independent of overcurrent trip.
G.
Test Accessories: Relay and meter test plugs.
H.
Low-DC-Voltage Alarm: Switchgear shall have a monitor for dc control power voltage with a
remote alarm located where indicated. Alarm shall sound if voltage falls to an adjustable value
to indicate an impending battery failure. Factory set alarm value at 80 percent of full-charge
voltage.
I.
Grounding and Testing Device: Suitable for phasing out, testing, and grounding switchgear bus
or feeder if device is installed in place of circuit breaker. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Portable Grounding and Testing Device: Interchangeable with drawout-mounting,
medium-voltage circuit breakers to provide interlocked electrical access to either bus or
feeder; electrically operated.
System control cabinet permanently mounted near switchgear.
Portable Remote-Control Station: For grounding and testing device.
Control-Cabinet Coupler Cable: Of adequate length to connect device inserted in any
switchgear cubicle and control cabinet.
Remote-Control Coupler Cable: 50 feet (15 m) long to connect control cabinet and
portable remote-control station.
Permanent Control Power Wiring: From control cabinet to power source.
Protective Cover: Fabricated of heavy-duty plastic and fitted to device.
Approval of Grounding and Testing Device System: Obtain approval of final system
design from utility company and agency designated by Cleveland Clinic to handle future
maintenance of medium-voltage switchgear.
J.
Ground Ball Studs: Ground ball studs shall be provided on load side of circuit breakers and line
side of main to allow for apparatus grounding clamps during maintenance.
K.
Main-Tie-Main arrangements shall have automatic throw-over controls.
L.
Key Interlocks: Arranged for interlocking schemes indicated.
M.
Network Communications Equipment: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems with the following features:
1.
The communication system network shall be as described in Section 260913.
2.
Each breaker position (open and closed) shall be communicated via an addressable relay.
This relay shall communicate over the network. The relay shall monitor an auxiliary
switch contact that monitors the breaker position and shall be rated for the application.
Each relay shall have a unique address so that it is possible to “call up” and “read” each
breaker’s position from a host computer.
3.
The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the
switchgear, including relays and electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a
set of easily accessible terminal blocks.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Control power for addressable relays shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz available from a fused
control transformer.
TEST CABINET
A.
2.6
Circuit-Breaker Test Cabinet: Separately mounted and containing push buttons for circuitbreaker closing and tripping, control relay, fuses, and secondary coupler with cable
approximately 108 inches (2740 mm) long. Include a set of secondary devices for operating
circuit breaker if removed from switchgear and moved near test cabinet. Include provision for
storage of test and maintenance accessories in cabinet.
FABRICATION
A.
Indoor Enclosure: Steel.
B.
Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA Type 3R, galvanized steel, listed for installation outdoors.
1.
Each compartment shall have the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Structural design and anchorage adequate to resist loads imposed by 125-mph
(200-km/h) wind.
Space heater operating at one-half or less of rated voltage, sized to prevent
condensation.
Aisle-less construction, full height doors in front of basic weatherproof equipment,
rear hinged doors for each section, all with provisions for padlocking. Downward,
rearward sloping roof. Integral structural steel base frame with factory-applied
undercoating.
Interior light with switch.
Weatherproof GFCI duplex receptacle.
Power for heaters, lights, and receptacles to be provided by control power
transformer.
Ventilation louvers equipped with insect and rodent screen and filter, and arranged
to permit air circulation while excluding rodents and exterior dust.
C.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray finish over rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated
metal surfaces.
D.
Bus Transition Unit: Arranged to suit bus and adjacent units.
E.
Incoming-Line Unit: Arranged to suit incoming line.
F.
Outgoing Feeder Units: Arranged to suit distribution feeders.
G.
Auxiliary Compartments: Arranged to house customer metering, relays, controls, and auxiliary
equipment; isolated from medium-voltage components.
H.
Inspection windows, 4” diameter, in front/rear panels of each cubicle, to permit thermal imaging
of terminations, with sliding cover.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
COMPONENTS
A.
Main Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points; full length of switchgear.
B.
Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated or copper, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50
mm); full length of switchgear.
C.
Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation.
D.
Provide insulating boots on all cable terminations.
E.
Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1.
2.
F.
Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of
0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters,
and instruments.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems, listed and labeled by an NRTL, and with the following features:
1.
2.
Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated
to 600 V.
Switch-selectable digital display with the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
G.
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus
or minus 2 percent.
i.
Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored
values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
Network Communications: Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with
power monitoring equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and
Control" for successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.
1.
2.
Connect remote monitoring communication module to Cleveland Clinic’s data network
through appropriate network interface unit.
The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the
switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily
accessible terminal blocks suitable for remote monitoring of meter quantities and
functions.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Control power shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz available from a fused control
transformer.
H.
Protective Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type; with test blocks and
plugs.
I.
Surge Arresters: Distribution class [SPECIFY RATING], metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply
with NEMA LA 1.
1.
2.
Install in cable termination compartments in each phase of circuit.
Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.
J.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchgear interior, including instruments
and instrument transformers. [TROPICAL LOCATIONS ONLY]
K.
Control Power Supply for Metal-Clad Switchgear: Control power transformer supplies 120-V
control circuits through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:
1.
2.
Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including
primary and secondary fuses.
Two control power transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking
relays; each transformer connected to line side of associated main switch for M-T-M
arrangements.
a.
b.
3.
L.
Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses provide current-limiting and overload
protection.
Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
1.
2.
2.8
Secondary windings connected through relay(s) to control bus to affect an
automatic transfer scheme.
Secondary windings connected through an internal automatic transfer switch to
switchgear control power bus.
Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.
CONTROL BATTERY SYSTEM for METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR
A.
System Requirements: Battery shall have number of cells and ampere-hour capacity based on
an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25 deg C with electrolyte at normal level and minimum
ambient temperature of 13 deg C. Cycle battery before shipment to guarantee rated capacity on
installation. Arrange battery to operate ungrounded.
B.
Battery: Lead-calcium, maintenance-free type in sealed, clear plastic or glass containers,
complete with electrolyte, fully charged and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells.
Limit weight of each container to not more than 70 lb (32 kg) and cells per container to not
more than 3. System batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature ranging
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
from minus 18 to 25 deg C. Limit variation of current output to 0.8 percent for each degree
below 25 deg C down to minus 8 deg C. For outdoor installations: Thermostatically controlled
heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient
temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
C.
Rack: Two-step rack with electrical connections between battery cells and between rows of
cells; include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads. [Rate
battery rack, cell supports, and anchorage for seismic requirements.]
D.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Charger: Provide products by La Marche. Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with automatic
regulation and provision for manual and automatic adjustment of charging rate. Unit shall
automatically maintain output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated charger output
current, with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and input-frequency
variation of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features of charger include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.9
Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales.
Hydrometer syringes.
Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance.
Wall-mounting, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items.
Set of cell numerals.
DC ammeter.
DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with toggle
switch to select between battery and charger voltages.
Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground, connected
in series between negative and positive terminals, with midpoint junction connected to
ground by normally open push-button contact.
Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and 2.25 V
per cell and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.
Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to higher
charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until manually reset.
AC power supply is 120 V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in voltage
and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power supply for any
interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger regulates rate of
charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or circuit breakers from
opening.
Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current to
rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac supply; to
protect charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on output terminals.
Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger's audible noise to less than 26 dB.
UTILITY COMPANY EQUIPMENT
A.
Where required, provide separate cubicles for utility metering equipment. Utility metering
vertical section shall contain provisions for current transformers and voltage transformers as
required by the Utility. The construction shall conform to the Utility Company’s metering
standards. It shall also conform to the general electrical and construction design of the
switchgear specified above.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Provide suitable arrangements within the utility primary metering cubicles for mounting
metering equipment, including drilling or tapping the bus. Obtain the Utility's approval of the
cubicle arrangements prior to fabrication of the switchgear.
C.
This Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of utility metering
equipment by utility personnel.
2.10
A.
2.11
SPACE FOR FUTURE DEVICES
Where indicated on the Drawings, "space" shall mean fully provisioned space ready for
inserting a circuit breaker at a future date without any future modifications. Provide current
transformers sized according to the breaker frame size. A blank door shall close off the front of
the compartment.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Materials: Refer to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify units,
devices, controls, and wiring.
B.
Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus applied to front of switchgear, arranged in single-line
diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved final mimicbus diagram.
1.
2.
3.
2.12
A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Before shipment of equipment, perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
B.
Production tests on circuit breakers according to ANSI C37.09.
Production tests on completed switchgear assembly according to IEEE C37.20.2.
Assemble switchgear and equipment in manufacturer's plant and perform the following:
1.
2.
C.
Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to
produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and
connections.
Medium: Painted graphics, as approved.
Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background.
Functional tests of all relays, instruments, meters, and control devices by application of
secondary three-phase voltage to voltage circuits and injection of current in current
transformer secondary circuits.
Functional test of all control and trip circuits. Connect test devices into circuits to
simulate operation of controlled remote equipment such as circuit-breaker trip coils, close
coils, and auxiliary contacts. Test proper operation of relay targets.
Prepare equipment for shipment.
1.
Provide suitable crating, blocking, and supports so equipment will withstand expected
domestic shipping and handling shocks and vibration.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 13
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
2.13
A.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Weatherproof equipment for shipment. Close connection openings to prevent entrance of
foreign material during shipment and storage.
FACTORY FINISHES
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color finish applied to equipment before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Anchor switchgear assembly to concrete base and attach by bolting.
1.
[Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements
and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]
2.
Interior location: Concrete base 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered
edges. Extend base no less than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum
dimensions of switchgear, unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic
anchor support.] Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.
Exterior location: Mount switchgear on concrete slabs. Unless otherwise indicated, the
slab shall be at least 8 inches (200mm) thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 inch (150 by 150mm) No. 6 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches (100-mm) from the top of the slab. Slab shall
be placed on a 6 inch (150-mm) thick, well-compacted gravel base. The top of the
concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches (100-mm) above the finished grade. Edges
shall be chamfered. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches (200mm) beyond the equipment.
a.
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement
as specified in Division 03 Sections.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 14
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
Frame under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.
a.
b.
2.
3.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control
and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Division 26 Section "Medium-Voltage
Cables."
B.
Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued
connections and values.
C.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables" and "Medium-Voltage Cables."
E.
Provide all communications wiring between remote monitoring communication modules and
the Cleveland Clinic’s data network. Verify that each circuit breaker’s address for
microprocessor-communication packages corresponds to Division 26 Section “Electrical Power
Monitoring and Control Systems” requirements.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the
following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Inspect switchgear, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust components and equipment.
Assist in field testing of equipment.
Report results in writing.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 15
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Switchgear.
Circuit breakers.
Protective relays.
Instrument transformers.
Metering and instrumentation.
Ground-fault systems.
Battery systems.
Surge arresters.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each switchgear lineup. Remove front and rear panels so
joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
2.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked
and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26
Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." Post a durable copy of the
"as-left" relay settings and fuse ratings in a convenient location within the switchgear.
CLEANING
A.
3.8
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and
debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
3.9
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature
and humidity within manufacturers’ stipulated service conditions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.
END OF SECTION 261300
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
261300 - 16
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262011 – ISOLATED POWER CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes Isolated Power Panelboards (IPP) and Line Isolation Monitors (LIM) to be
installed in operating rooms and other designated clinical spaces, such as Laser suite.
B.
Related sections:
1.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for receptacles and grounding jacks.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
[DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
1.4
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power and LIM wiring.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards.
ISOLATED POWER CENTERS
262011 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
[DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED ] Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification
that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Field quality-control reports.
C.
Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Comply with NFPA 99.
E.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by PG Life-Link
(Post Glover), IDP Series. Other acceptable manufacturers include:
1.
SquareD/Schneider.
2.
Isotrol/Bender.
ISOLATED POWER CENTERS
262011 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ISOLATED POWER PANELBOARDS
A.
[ DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Enclosures: Flush-mounted cabinets of 14 GA galvanized steel and a backplate of 12 GA steel
with a finish coat of white or ivory epoxy enamel. Comply with UL 50.
1.
Front trim shall be 14 GA, type 304 stainless steel polished to a #4 brushed finish.
2.
Front trim: Secured to box with ten stainless steel screws and washers with standard door
within trim cover.
3.
C.
a.
The front trim shall extend one inch on all sides of the backbox.
b.
The front trim shall contain a cutout for the LIM which shall be visible at all times.
c.
The door shall contain a flush key-locking slam latch.
d.
The door shall have a full length hinge.
e.
With door open only the circuit breaker handles shall be accessible.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
1.
Reference ground bus shall have one - #4-2/0 and nineteen - #14-4 ground lugs.
D.
Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type. Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
E.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
2.3
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
B.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Up to sixteen circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
C.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 1047, fully rated to meet available
fault currents.
1.
2.4
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Full size, bolt-on, two pole, inverse time-current
element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short
circuits, minimum 10,000 AIC. Silver alloy contacts.
ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
A.
Isolation transformer: single phase, 60 Hz, with kVA, primary and secondary voltages as
indicated on drawings. Comply with UL 506.
1.
Class H insulation.
ISOLATED POWER CENTERS
262011 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6.
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Electrostatic shield between primary and secondary grounded to case.
Leakage current to ground shall comply with UL 1047.
Maximum sound level shall not exceed 35 dB.
Temperature rise limited to 115 deg C under full load.
Self cooled by natural convection.
Transformer to be mounted in an upright position on a 12 GA shelf mounted to the back
box by at least four bolts.
LINE ISOLATION MONITOR
A.
2.6
Line Isolation Monitor (LIM): self testing and self calibrating; shall continuously monitor the
impedance of each phase to ground; shall be capable of detecting all combinations of resistive
and capacitive faults, balanced, unbalanced, and hybrid.
1.
Comply with UL 1022 and NFPA 99.
2.
Indicating LED’s: GREEN indicates “safe”, RED indicates “hazard”.
3.
When total hazard current reaches 2 mA or 5 mA (field adjustable), audible alarm shall
sound and red LED shall illuminate.
4.
Momentary test switch shall be provided.
5.
Analog and digital display.
6.
Remote Alarm Panel: Provide remote annunciation and control of LIM functions.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Power Receptacle Panels: Flush, mounted, galvanized steel backbox with 4 -20A hospital grade,
red, duplex receptacles or 4 single twist lock receptacles, mounted in a 14 GA, polished 304
stainless steel trim cover. The back box shall contain a copper ground bus with 18 connection
points plus one lug to accommodate up to one #1/0 conductor.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of simulated faults, provide an isolated power system
test kit. Not required if Facility has existing test kit for similar panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to
NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
[DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements
specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]
C.
Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E.
Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future.
ISOLATED POWER CENTERS
262011 - 4
FOR:
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
F.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
G.
Install quantity of Power Receptacle and Ground Jack panels as indicated on Drawings.
H.
All wiring shall be color coded, type XHHW with cross-linked PE insulation and a dielectric
constant of 3.5 or less, installed in EMT.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Cleveland Clinic's final
room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
A factory technician shall perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit, verify circuit is clear of ground faults, shorts, and open
circuits.
Check calibration of the LIM.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification and Manufacturer’s recommendations. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection report, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
actions taken, and observations after remedial action.
F.
Cleaning: Vacuum dirt and debris from panelboard tubs; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning.
END OF SECTION 262011
ISOLATED POWER CENTERS
262011 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with
capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1.
1.3
Distribution transformers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum
clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of
transformer indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
1.4
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT
CONDITIONS] Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a.
b.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
B.
Source quality-control test reports.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Submit Letter of Compliance with NEMA TP-1 and DOE 2010.
E.
Submit certification of sound level compliance.
1.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
D.
Comply with
E.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
F.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
1.7
Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control
of temperature and humidity.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer
provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
2.
General Electric Company.
3.
Schneider Electric; Square D.
GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B.
Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C.
Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1.
2.
2.3
Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
Coil Material: Copper.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B.
Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" [WHERE REQUIRED BY
PROJECT CONDITIONS].
C.
Cores: One leg per phase.
D.
Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1.
E.
Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.
1.
F.
Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1.
G.
Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray.
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent
taps below normal full capacity.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
H.
Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of
115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
I.
Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
J.
K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for non-sinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1.
2.
3.
K.
Comply with NEMA TP 1, exceed CSL-3 efficiency levels.
Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
Comply with DOE 2010.
Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
The neutral bus shall be configured to accommodate 200% of the rated current.
Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize inter-winding capacitance.
1.
2.
3.
Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and
output terminals.
Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
Shield Effectiveness:
a.
b.
c.
Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33
picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5
kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.
L.
Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. [UP TO 45 KVA ONLY]
M.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core. [RETAIN PARAGRAPH
FOR TROPICAL INSTALLATIONS]
N.
Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound
levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.
2.4
DRIVE ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Motor drive isolation transformers shall be designed for use with three-phase ac adjustable
frequency drives 600 volts and below to provide isolation between the incoming line and drive
circuitry. These drives minimize the line disturbances caused by SCR firing within the drive
unit. Thermo-guards shall be included in all motor drive isolation transformers to provide
additional protection for the transformer from increased heating due to the non-sinusoidal
characteristics of drive currents. The transformer shall provide reduced short-circuit currents
and voltage line transients. The transformer shall be specifically sized to the drive kVA
requirements dictated by the horsepower of the motor and, as such, will be mechanically braced
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
to withstand the stress of current reversals and short-circuit currents associated with the specific
drive kVA rating. Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA
TP-1 when operated at 35% of full load capacity.
2.5
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.6
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
B.
Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for
each transformer.
B.
Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where
transformers will be installed.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance
shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by
transformer manufacturer.
1.
B.
[Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]
Construct concrete bases 4 inches high for floor mounted transformers and anchor transformers
to pad according to manufacturer's written instructions [, seismic codes applicable to Project,]
and requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Do not install transformers in ceiling cavities.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connection to Transformers: Flexible Metallic Conduit (FMC), primary and secondary.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
1.
External cable shall be rated 90 degrees C (sized at 75 degrees C ampacity) for
encapsulated and 75 degrees C for ventilated designs. Connectors should be selected on
the basis of the type and cable size used to wire the specific transformer.
2.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
D.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
E.
Infrared Scanning: after Substantial Completion, but prior to beneficial occupancy, perform an
infrared scan of all transformer connections.
1.
2.
F.
Uses an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B.
Output Settings Report: Prepare written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
END OF SECTION 262200
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
262200 - 7
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated
1000 V and less for use in AC systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for communication
features of power distribution system devices.
Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and
communication equipment located in the switchgear.
Division 26 Section "Secondary Unit Substations" for switchgear that forms a part of a
unit substation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.
Enclosure types and details.
Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,
and weights of each assembled section.
Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including
phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.
Current rating of buses.
Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly.
Nameplate legends.
Mimic-bus diagram.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 1
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
i.
2.
C.
1.4
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color
charts showing colors available for mimic bus.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances,
and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show
switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical
elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field
measurements.
B.
[Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear,
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
Include the following:
1.
Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a” or “b” below]
a.
b.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.]
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections
have been made, for record.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 2
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
1.6
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.7
Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer fuses
and control power fuses.
Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear
and are based on the specific system indicated.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by UL and marked for intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
F.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B.
Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical
damage.
C.
If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather,
dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable
materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent
condensation.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide
pathway for moving switchgear into place.
B.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 3
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
2.
3.
4.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic's written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.10
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent
surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.
C.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
requirements are specified in Division 03.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation: Magnum DS.
2.
General Electric Company: AKD-20.
3.
Square D; Schneider Electric: Power-Zone 4.
RATINGS
A.
Nominal System Voltage [480/277 V, 4] [208/120 V, 4] wire, 60 Hz.
B.
Main-Bus Continuous: <Insert size> A.
C.
Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current:
switchgear assembly.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in
262300 - 4
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
2.3
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
FABRICATION
A.
Factory assembled and tested and complying with ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.
B.
Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.
C.
Finish: ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer
on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.
D.
Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to rear of
section.
E.
Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and tie
circuit breaker.
F.
Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and
shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.
G.
Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of
switchgear.
H.
Inspection windows, 4” diameter, in rear panels to permit thermal imaging of terminations, with
sliding cover.
I.
Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the
following:
1.
Bus transition sections.
2.
Incoming-line sections.
3.
Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
J.
Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are
not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.
Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with
pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. Include braces
for neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders.
Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare
circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum
conductivity, with copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
Use copper for connecting circuit-breaker line to copper bus.
Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped
with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with pressure
connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches
(6 by 50 mm).
Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents.
Service Entrance shall comply with UL Service Entrance requirements: service entrance
label, incoming line isolation barriers, neutral connection to switchgear ground for solidly
grounded wye systems.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 5
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
11.
12.
13.
14.
Neutral bus equipped with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral
conductors. Neutral-bus extensions for busway feeders are braced.
Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, un-insulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus,
arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.
Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by
means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.
Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-retardant
tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.
a.
b.
2.4
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum.
Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed and
reinstalled.
COMPONENTS
A.
Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
1.
2.
B.
Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of
0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for
connected relays, meters, and instruments.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: UL-listed or -recognized, microprocessor-based unit
suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
1.
2.
Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated
to 600 V.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus
or minus 2 percent.
Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored
values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
3.
Metering Compartment: Provide 6 port Ethernet switch, graphic display module, meter,
gateway, RJ45 to RJ45 receptacle, 120 VAC to 12 VDC power supply. Display and
control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.
4.
Comply with Section 260913, “Electrical Power Monitoring and Control” for metering
equipment.
C.
Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as indicated; with test blocks and plugs.
D.
Surge Arresters: UL listed surge protective device. Comply with Section 264313.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 6
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
E.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports,
necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.
F.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for switchgear interior, including instruments
and instrument transformers. [For tropical locations only]
G.
Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through
secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:
1.
2.
Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including
primary and secondary fuses.
[Provide for electrically interlocked main-tie-main arrangements] Two control power
transformers in separate compartments with necessary interlocking relays; each
transformer connected to line side of associated main circuit breaker.
a.
b.
3.
4.
H.
Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses with current-limiting and overload
protection.
Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
1.
2.
2.5
Secondary windings connected through a relay or relays to control bus to affect an
automatic transfer scheme.
Secondary windings connected through an internal automatic transfer switch to
switchgear control power bus.
Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13 AND UL 1066.
1.
Eaton “Magnum DS” or equal by General Electric or Square D.
B.
Ratings: As indicated, fully rated, for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings
for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.
C.
Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating
mechanism with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.
Stored-Energy Mechanism: [Manually charged] [Electrically charged, with optional
manual charging (FOR ‘Main-Tie-Main’ ARRANGEMENTS)].
Operation counter.
Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current
transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 7
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Eaton Digi-Trip 1150 plus or equal by General Electric or Square D.
Functions:
Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,
independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
Minimum sensor size shall be 800 A which can be set at 50 percent of breaker rating.
Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to
plus 40 deg C.
Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit
breakers, or a combination of these methods.
Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked
"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip shorttime-trip function for switchable I2t operation.
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-timedelay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:
a.
b.
c.
Three-wire circuit or system.
Four-wire circuit or system.
Four-wire, double-ended substation.
11.
Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to
indicate type of fault.
12.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking phase and
ground-fault protection function with the downstream circuit breakers so that the breaker
closest to the fault will clear the fault without disruption of service to other parts of the
distribution system.
13.
Maintenance mode switched trip units: The trip unit shall utilize Arc Flash Reduction
Maintenance System to reduce the instantaneous pickup value when activated. The
ARMS shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds with a minimum of settings from
2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS shall be enabled by a switch on the trip unit
with blue indicator LED. A remote communication link shall also be provided for
enable/disable and confirmation.
E.
Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare
auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation,
quantity as indicated. Each consists of two-type "a" and two-type "b" stages (contacts) wired
through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.
F.
Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to
position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions.
Include the following features:
1.
2.
Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is
closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or
disconnected position.
Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from
connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door
closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 8
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door
open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:
a.
b.
Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect
devices and ground contact engaged.
Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact
disengaged.
G.
Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected
position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from
switchgear.
H.
Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure
its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism. Provisions shall be included for
padlocking the breaker in the open or closed position.
I.
Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.
J.
Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.
K.
Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent
design and electrical interlocks.
L.
(DELETE THIS ITEM ON SINGLE ENDED SWITCHGEAR )Key Interlocks: Arranged so
keys are attached at devices indicated and requires one main circuit breaker in a double-ended
unit substation to be open before the tie circuit breaker can be closed. Mountings and hardware
are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.
M.
(DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED) [Undervoltage Trip Devices: Where indicated, adjustable
time-delay and pickup voltage.]
N.
Shunt-Trip Devices: Provide on source breakers for Closed Transition Transfer Switches.
O.
Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit
breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.
P.
Lugs: Mechanical style, rated for Copper conductors only, suitable for number, size, and trip
ratings.
Q.
Grounding Ball Studs: provide on incoming lug pad and outgoing lug pad.
R.
Provide shorting blocks for maintenance.
2.6
SPACE FOR FUTURE DEVICES
A.
Where indicated on the Drawings, "space" shall mean fully provisioned space ready for
inserting a circuit breaker at a future date without any future modifications. Provide current
transformers sized according to the breaker frame size. A blank door shall close off the front of
the compartment.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 9
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
2.7
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
TIE BREAKER CONTROL (DELETE THESE PARAGRAPHS IF SWITCHGEAR IS
SINGLE ENDED)
A.
Provide automatic transfer control equipment to transfer a load bus from its normal source of
supply to an alternate source. Voltage sensing on each source shall be three phase with loss of
phase protection. All transfer scheme logic shall be incorporated into and executed by a
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC shall receive the following inputs: source
voltage status as sensed by the voltage relays, beaker status (open, closed, tripped on fault) for
main and bus tie breakers. Interposing relays shall be provided for interfacing the PLC outputs
with the circuit breaker close and trip circuits. Additional PLC outputs shall be provided for
local indication of the following: transfer scheme status (auto-blue / manual-white) and PLC
fault (amber). If the control power source for the PLC is derived from within the switchgear,
provide a dedicated "hold up device" for the PLC to ride through any momentary switching of
control power sources. The PLC programs shall be executed without interruption during an
undervoltage or loss of phase condition.
B.
Basic PLC logic features shall include: interlocking of the main and bus tie breakers to prevent
paralleling sources; time delay for initiating a transfer upon an undervoltage or loss of phase
condition; time delay for return to normal after the undervoltage or loss of phase condition has
been corrected; and blocking transfer, if the main or bus tie breaker trips due to a fault.
C.
Description of operation - three breaker transfers (main-tie-main), delayed transfer / delayed
return. Under normal conditions both main breakers are closed and the bus tie breaker is open.
The transfer system selector switch is in the auto position. When an undervoltage or loss of
phase condition is detected, the PLC receives an input from the voltage sensing relays. The PLC
program executes, tripping the affected main breaker by its interposing trip relay after the
programmed time delay. The PLC senses the open main breaker status and the program
immediately closes the bus tie breaker by its interposing close relay. With the return of the
affected source, the PLC trips the bus tie breaker by its interposing trip relay after the
programmed time delay. The PLC senses the open tie breaker and the program immediately
recloses the open main breaker by its interposing relay. Simultaneous loss of both sources shall
not cause any change in breaker status. Upon return of one source, the PLC shall immediately
trip the main breaker without voltage and close the bus tie breaker.
D.
Manual operation - Control switches for the main and bus tie breakers are inoperative when the
transfer system control selector switch is in the auto position. Turning the transfer system
control selector switch to the manual position allows the main and bus tie breakers to be
manually closed and tripped via their control switches. Electrical interlocking in the breaker
close circuits prevents both main breakers and the tie breaker from being closed at the same
time. Redundant electrical interlocking, separate from the PLC, shall be provided for the main
and tie breakers and shall be operational only when the automatic transfer system is in the
manual mode. To transfer the loads from one source to the other, the affected main breaker must
first be opened and then the bus tie breaker can be manually closed. To return to normal, trip the
bus tie breaker and reclose the main breaker via their respective control switches.
E.
The PLC shall be able to communicate via RS-485 / Modbus RTU protocol.
2.8
ACCESSORIES
A.
Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and
switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 10
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
1.
2.
3.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected
positions.
Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without
removal from switchgear.
Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class
relays.
B.
Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Overhead-circuit-breaker lifting device, track mounted at
top front of switchgear and complete with hoist and lifting yokes matching each size of drawout
circuit breaker installed.
C.
Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of
maintenance manual.
2.9
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.
B.
Connect remote monitoring communication modules to Cleveland Clinic’s data network
through appropriate network interface unit to the Building Automation System.
C.
The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the
switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily
accessible terminal blocks.
2.10
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and
lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to
produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and
connections.
Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.
Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and
major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Frame size of each circuit breaker.
Trip rating for each circuit breaker.
Conduit and wire size for each feeder.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 11
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with
installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.
B.
Anchor switchgear assembly to concrete base and attach by bolting.
1.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend
base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of
switchgear unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.]
Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems" and Division 3 Concrete Sections.
2.
[Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements
and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:
1.
Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
a.
b.
2.
3.4
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control
and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
components, and major loads.
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 12
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
C.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and
values.
D.
Provide all communications wiring between remote monitoring communication modules and
the Cleveland Clinic’s data network. Verify that each circuit breaker’s address for
microprocessor-communication packages corresponds to Division 26 Section “Electrical Power
Monitoring and Control Systems” requirements.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and
equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.
Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal
by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies
with requirements in Division 26 Sections.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and
components.
Report results in writing.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Switchgear.
Circuit breakers.
Protective relays.
Instrument transformers.
Metering and instrumentation.
Ground-fault systems.
Battery systems.
Surge arresters.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 13
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
D.
3.6
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear line-up. Remove front and rear panels
so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
2.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26
Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
CLEANING
A.
3.8
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.
END OF SECTION 262300
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262300 - 14
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262313 - PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal-clad, low-voltage circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V and less,
and associated control systems, for paralleling generators on an isolated bus and for distributing
power in AC systems.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for communication
features of power distribution system devices.
Division 26 Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors
and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B.
HMI: Human machine interface.
C.
OIP: Operator Interface Panel.
D.
PSG: Paralleling Switch Gear.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Electrical characteristics, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
Time-current characteristic curves for individual relays and overcurrent protective
devices.
Description of sequence of operation for paralleling controls.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 1
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
1.4
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS [ IF REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]
A.
[Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchgear,
components, and accessories will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
a.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based.]
B.
Source quality-control test reports.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and maintenance data.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
B.
Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for switchgear test,
inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformers,
control power circuits, and fusible devices.
Floor-running transport or dock-able dolly with manual lifting mechanism and all other
items necessary to remove circuit breaker from housing and transport to remote location.
Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected
positions, and a secondary test coupler to permit testing of circuit breaker without
removal from switchgear.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on
the specific system indicated.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 2
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100 by UL and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
E.
Provide circuit breakers of the same manufacturer as that specified for other electrical
distribution equipment.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere
ratings for the following conditions:
1.
2.
1.9
Ambient temperature not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
Altitude of not more than 6000 feet above sea level.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERATOR PARALLELING MONITOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturer
specified:
1.
Russelectric.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 3
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
B.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Individual Generator Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide each generator with a control and
monitoring panel that allows the operator to view status and control operation of respective
generator. Provide panel with the following features and characteristics:
1.
Generator Metering: 1 percent accuracy class or better.
a.
b.
Ammeter, voltmeter, frequency meter, wattmeter, kilowatt-hour meter, and power
factor meter.
Synchroscope and "Generator Set Synchronized" Indication:
1)
2)
c.
d.
2.
Engine run-time meter, start counter, rpm meter, and battery voltage meter.
Engine oil temperature gage and engine coolant temperature gage.
Generator Protective and Control Switches: Provide oiltight, industrial-grade switches in
generator control and monitoring panel.
a.
Mode Selector Switch (Run/Off/Auto):
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
"Run" mode to start and accelerate unit to rated speed and voltage, but not
close paralleling circuit breaker.
"Off" mode to prevent generator from starting or to immediately shutdown
generator if running.
"Auto" mode to allow generator to start on receipt of remote start signal.
Circuit-Breaker Trip/Close Switch: Interlocked with system control so that circuitbreaker closure is impossible unless the following occurs:
1)
2)
Mode selector switch is in "Run" position.
Generator set is synchronized with system bus.
Control/reset push button with flashing lamp to indicate generator is locked out
due to fault condition.
Lamp test push button to simultaneously test all lamps on panel.
Control Panel Illumination: DC lamps to illuminate panel when lighting from
surrounding environment is not available.
Emergency Stop Push Button: Red mushroom-head switch maintaining its
position until manually reset.
Voltage and Frequency Raise/Lower Switches:
1)
3.
Provide lamp or LED indication of synchronization.
Provide 360-degree analog movement synchroscope.
Allow plus/minus 5 percent adjustment when generator set is operating but
not paralleled.
Generator Protective and Control Devices: Solid-state industrial relays, integrated
microprocessor-based control devices, and other accessories and devices located either in
generator control and monitoring panel or in switchgear control section to provide the
following features and functions:
a.
Kilowatt Load Sharing Control:
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 4
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
1)
2)
b.
2)
2)
3)
4)
2)
3)
Adjusts engine governor to match voltage, frequency, and phase angle of
paralleling bus.
Maintains generator-set voltage within 1 percent of bus voltage, and phase
angle within 20 electrical degrees of paralleling bus for 0.5 seconds before
circuit-breaker closing.
Provides "fail-to-synchronize time delay" adjustable from 10 to 120
seconds; with field selectivity to either initiate alarm or shut down generator
set on failure condition.
Reverse Power Monitor and Control:
1)
2)
g.
Monitors and verifies that generator set has reached 90 percent of nominal
voltage and frequency before closing to bus.
Prevents out-of-phase paralleling if two or more generator sets reach
operating conditions simultaneously, by sending "inhibit" signal to sets not
designated by system as "first to close to bus."
Recognizes failure of "first-to-close" generator set and signals system
paralleling to continue.
Prevents out-of-phase closure to bus due to errant manual or automatic
operation of synchronizer.
Synchronizer Control:
1)
f.
Operates alternator excitation system while generator set is paralleled.
Causes sharing of reactive load among all generator sets to within 1 percent
of equal levels without voltage drop.
Sync-Check and Paralleling Monitor and Control:
1)
e.
Causes generator set to ramp down to zero load when signaled to shut down
in load-demand mode.
Causes generator set to ramp up to a proportional share of total bus load.
Kilovolt Ampere Rating Load Sharing Control:
1)
2)
d.
Operates engine governors during synchronizing and provides isochronous
load sharing when paralleled.
Allows generator set to ramp up to kilowatt load level signaled by system
master controller.
Load-Demand Governing Control:
1)
c.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Prevents sustained reverse power flow in generator set.
Trips generator circuit breaker and initiates generator set shutdown when
reverse power condition exceeds 10 percent of generator set kilowatt for
three seconds.
Phase Rotation Monitor and Control:
1)
Verifies generator set and paralleling bus phase rotation match prior to
closing paralleling circuit breaker.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 5
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
h.
Electronic Alternator Overcurrent Alarm and Shutdown Control:
1)
2)
3)
i.
Initiates alarm when sensing loss of excitation to alternator while paralleled
to system bus.
Generator-Set Start Contacts: Redundant system, 10 A at 32-V dc.
Cool-Down Time-Delay Control: Adjustable, 0 to 600 seconds.
Start Time-Delay Control: Adjustable, 0 to 300 seconds.
Paralleling Circuit-Breaker Monitor and Control:
1)
2)
3)
4.
Provides shutdown when load current is more than 175 percent of rated
current and combined time/current approaches thermal damage curve of
alternator. Provide without instantaneous-trip function.
Loss of Excitation Monitor:
1)
k.
l.
m.
n.
Monitors current flow at generator-set output terminals.
Initiates alarm when load current on generator set is more than 110 percent
of rated current for more than 60 seconds.
Provides overcurrent shutdown function matched to thermal damage curve
of alternator. Provide without instantaneous-trip function.
Electronic Alternator Short-Circuit Protection:
1)
j.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Monitors circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
Initiates fault signal if circuit breaker fails to close within adjustable timedelay period (0.5 to 15 seconds).
Trips open and locks out paralleling circuit breaker upon paralleling circuit
breaker failure to close, until manually reset.
Engine Protection and Local Annunciation:
a.
b.
c.
Provide annunciation and shutdown control modules for alarms indicated.
Provide visual alarm status indicator and alarm horn with silence/acknowledge
push button on generator control and monitoring panel.
Annunciate the following conditions:
1)
Status, Light Only (Non-latching):
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
2)
Generator engine control switch not in auto (red).
Generator engine control-switch in auto (green).
Emergency mode (red).
Generator circuit breaker-closed (red).
Generator circuit breaker-open (green).
Engine stopped (green).
Engine running (red).
Engine cool-down (amber).
Pre-Alarm, Light and Horn (Non-latching):
a)
b)
Pre-high coolant temperature (amber).
Pre-low oil pressure (amber).
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 6
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
c)
d)
e)
f)
3)
Low coolant temperature (amber).
Engine low battery (amber).
Engine low fuel (amber).
Generator fails to synchronize (amber).
Shutdown Alarm, Light and Horn (Latching):
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
C.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Engine overcrank (red).
Engine overspeed (red).
Engine low oil pressure (red).
Engine high coolant temperature (red).
Engine low coolant level (red).
Engine remote emergency shutdown (red).
Generator circuit breaker tripped (red).
Generator loss of field (red).
Generator reverse power (red).
Generator undervoltage (red).
Generator overvoltage (red).
Generator under frequency (red).
Generator over frequency (red).
Master Control System and Monitoring Equipment: Paralleling and monitoring equipment,
components, and accessories for multiple generators with the following features and
characteristics:
1.
2.
Components and devices shall be mounted in the switchgear control section of the
switchgear lineup.
Paralleled System Metering: 1 percent accuracy class or better to monitor total output of
generator bus.
a.
Ammeter, voltmeter, frequency meter, wattmeter, kilowatt-hour meter, power
factor meter, kilovolt ampere, kilovolt ampere rating, and kilowatt demand meters.
1)
3.
Display all functions on the HMI device.
Full color high resolution 15 inch diagonal touchscreen HMI.
a.
b.
Allows operator to monitor and control the complete system of paralleled
generator sets.
Screens shall include the following:
1)
2)
Main Menu: Include date, time, and system status messages with screen
push buttons to access one-line diagram, system controls, load controls,
alarms, bus metering, and individual generator-set data.
One-Line Diagram Screen: Depicting system configuration and system
status by screen animation, screen colors, text messages, or pop-up
indicators. Indicate the following minimum system conditions:
a)
b)
c)
Generator sets, buses, and paralleling circuit breakers energized/deenergized.
Generator-set mode (run/off/auto).
Generator-set status (normal/warning/shutdown/load-demand stop).
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 7
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
d)
e)
f)
3)
AC Metering Screen: Displays the following minimum meter data for the
paralleling bus:
a)
b)
c)
4)
b)
c)
b)
c)
d)
b)
c)
d)
Provide the following minimum
Engine speed, oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, and
engine operating hours.
Three-phase voltage and current, kilowatt, power factor, and kilowatt
hour.
Generator control switch position and paralleling circuit-breaker
position.
All generator-set alarms.
System Control Screen:
minimum functions:
a)
7)
Generator manual start/stop control (functional only when generatorset mounted control switch is in "Auto" position).
Generator-set alarm reset.
Manual paralleling and circuit-breaker controls.
Generator-Set Data Display Screen:
parameters:
a)
6)
Phase volts and amperes, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere, kilovolt ampere
rating, power factor, frequency, kilowatt hour, and kilowatt demand.
Real-time trend chart for system kilowatts and volts updated on not
less than one-second intervals.
A minimum of one historical trend chart for total system loads with
intervals no shorter than five minutes and a minimum duration of four
hours.
Generator-Set Control Screen: Provides control over individual generator
sets from master system control panel. Includes the following minimum
functions:
a)
5)
Paralleling circuit-breaker status (open/closed/tripped).
Bus conditions (energized/de-energized).
Provide access to other screens.
Password protected and with the following
System Test Modes:
Test
with load/test
without
load/normal/retransfer time-delay override.
Test with Load: Starts and synchronizes generator sets on paralleling
bus; all loads are transferred to bus.
Test without Load: Starts and synchronizes generator sets on
paralleling bus but does not transfer loads to bus.
Time adjustments for retransfer time delay, transfer time delay,
system time delay on stopping, and system time delay on starting.
Load-Demand Control Screen: Monitors total load on system bus and
controls number of generator sets running so that capacity tracks load
demand.
a)
Load-Demand Control: On/off.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 8
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
b)
c)
8)
b)
Assigns "load-add sequence priority" to each load control relay with
designation for relay operation after a set number of generator sets are
online.
Assigns "load-shed sequence priority" to each load control relay with
designation for relay operation depending on number of generator sets
online.
Alarm Summary and Run Report Screen:
a)
b)
c)
4.
Indication of system available in kilowatts and amperes.
Control functions allow manual addition/removal of generator sets on
system, and activation of load-shed/load-restore functions.
Load-Add/Load-Shed Sequence Screen: Password protected and with the
following minimum functions:
a)
10)
Load-Demand Pickup Set Point: Adjustable from 90 to 40 percent in
5 percent increments.
Load-Demand Dropout Set Point: Adjustable from 20 to 70 percent
in 5 percent increments.
Manual Load Control Screen: Allows operator to manually add or delete
generator sets from paralleled system in response to system load parameters.
a)
b)
9)
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Lists most recent alarm conditions and status changes.
Lists a minimum of the most recent 32 alarm conditions by name and
time/date; acknowledges alarm conditions with time/date.
For each start signal, lists start time and date, stop time and date,
maximum kilowatt and ampere load on system during run time, and
start and stop times of individual generator sets.
Solid-State System Status Panel:
a.
b.
Provides visual alarm status indicator and alarm horn with silence/acknowledge
push button.
Annunciates the following conditions:
1)
Status, Light Only:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
2)
Running Status: Display generator set number and "green" runningstatus light.
Load demand mode (green).
Priority Load Status: Display load number and "green" on-status
light.
System test (green).
Remote system start (red).
Normal source available (green).
Connected to normal (green).
Generator source available (green).
Connected to generator source (green).
Status, Light and Alarm:
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 9
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
D.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Load-Shed Level Status: Displays load number and red load-shed,
status light.
Generator Alarm Status: Displays generator number and red "Check
Generator" status light.
Controller malfunction (red).
Check station battery (red).
Bus overload (red).
System not in auto (red).
Description of System Operation:
1.
Loss of Normal Power:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Failure of a Generator Set to Start or Synchronize:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
c.
On bus overload, load-shed control initiates load shedding.
If bus does not return to normal frequency within adjustable time period, additional
load continues to be shed until bus returns to normal frequency.
Loads shed can be reconnected to bus only by manual reset at HMI.
Load-Demand Mode:
a.
b.
c.
5.
After expiration of overcrank time delay, generator set shuts down and alarm is
initiated.
Priority controller prevents overload of system bus.
Manual override of priority controller at HMI allows addition of low-priority load
to bus.
Bus overload monitor protects bus from manual overloading.
Bus Overload:
a.
b.
4.
System receives "start" signal; all generator sets start and achieve rated voltage and
frequency.
System closes the first generator set achieving 90 percent of rated voltage to
paralleling bus.
"Priority load add" controls prevent overloading of system.
Remaining generator sets switched to synchronizers that control and then allow
closure of generator sets to paralleling bus.
On closure to paralleling bus, each generator set assumes its proportional share of
total load.
With "load-demand" function activated, controller continuously monitors total bus
load.
If bus load is below preset limits for 15 minutes, demand controller shuts down
generator sets in predetermined order until minimum number of sets are operating.
On sensing available bus capacity diminished to set point, controller starts and
closes generator sets to bus to accommodate load.
Return to Normal Power:
a.
Process starts on removal of start signals from system.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 10
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
b.
c.
2.2
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
When no load remains on paralleling bus, all generator breakers open, go through
cool-down period, and shut down.
If start signal is received during cool-down period, one generator set is reconnected
to bus, and system operation follows that of "loss of normal power."
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description: Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.
B.
Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded neutral system.
C.
Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.
D.
Access: Fabricate enclosure with hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of
switchgear.
E.
Phase-, Neutral-, and Ground-Bus Materials: Extend full length of switchgear.
1.
2.
F.
Phase and Neutral Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points.
Ground Bus: Copper, silver, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm).
Switchgear Components: Incorporate components as indicated on Drawings.
1.
Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.
a.
b.
2.
Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy
class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
Current Transformers: Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays,
meters, and instruments.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for threeor four-wire systems, listed and labeled by UL, and with the following features:
a.
b.
Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential
terminals rated to 600 V.
Switch-selectable digital display with the following features:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
c.
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes:
Plus or minus 2 percent.
Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent;
stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.
Mounting: Display and control unit that is flush or semi-flush mounted in
instrument compartment door.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 11
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
3.
4.
Relays: Comply with IEEE C37.90, integrated digital type; with test blocks and plugs.
Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplies 120-V control circuits
through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:
a.
b.
5.
Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and
for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
Identification: Electrical identification devices and installation requirements are specified in
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
H.
Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA,
including primary and secondary fuses.
Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses provide current-limiting and
overload protection.
Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and
complying with the following:
a.
G.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring.
Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, applied to front of switchgear, arranged in one-line
diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved
mimic-bus diagram.
Control Battery System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
System Requirements: Battery shall have number of cells and ampere-hour capacity
based on an initial specific gravity of 1.210 at 25 deg C with electrolyte at normal level
and minimum ambient temperature of 13 deg C. Cycle battery before shipment to
guarantee rated capacity on installation. Arrange battery to operate ungrounded.
Battery: Lead-calcium type in sealed, clear plastic or glass containers, complete with
electrolyte, fully charged, and arranged for shipment with electrolyte in cells. Limit
weight of each container to not more than 70 lb (32 kg) and cells per container to not
more than 3. System batteries shall be suitable for service at an ambient temperature
ranging from minus 18 to 25 deg C. Limit variation of current output to 0.8 percent for
each degree below 25 deg C down to minus 8 deg C.
Rack: Two-step rack with electrical connections between battery cells and between rows
of cells; include two flexible connectors with bolted-type terminals for output leads.
[Rate battery rack, cell supports, and anchorage for seismic requirements.]
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Thermometers with specific-gravity correction scales.
Hydrometer syringes.
Set of socket wrenches and other tools required for battery maintenance.
Wall-mounting, nonmetallic storage rack fitted to store above items.
Charger: Provide La Marche products. Static-type silicon rectifier equipped with
automatic regulation and provision for manual and automatic adjustment of charging rate.
Unit shall automatically maintain output voltage within 0.5 percent from no load to rated
charger output current, with ac input-voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent and
input-frequency variation of plus or minus 3 Hz. Other features include the following:
a.
DC ammeter.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 12
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.3
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
DC Voltmeter: Maximum error of 5 percent at full-charge voltage; operates with
toggle switch to select between battery and charger voltages.
Ground Indication: Two appropriately labeled lights to indicate circuit ground,
connected in series between negative and positive terminals, and with midpoint
junction connected to ground by normally open push-button contact.
Capacity: Sufficient to supply steady load, float-charge battery between 2.20 and
2.25 V per cell and equalizing charge at 2.33 V per cell.
Charging-Rate Switch: Manually operated switch provides for transferring to
higher charging rate. Charger operates automatically after switch operation until
manually reset.
AC power supply is 120 V, 60 Hz, subject to plus or minus 10 percent variation in
voltage and plus or minus 3-Hz variation in frequency. After loss of ac power
supply for any interval, charger automatically resumes charging battery. Charger
regulates rate of charge to prevent damage due to overload and to prevent fuses or
circuit breakers from opening.
Protective Feature: Current-limiting device or circuit, which limits output current
to rating of charger but does not disconnect charger from either battery or ac
supply; protects charger from damage due to overload, including short circuit on
output terminals.
Electrical Filtering: Reduces charger's audible noise to less than 26 dB.
METAL-CLAD, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR (1000 V AND LESS)
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified: [manufacturer selected shall match that of other electrical
equipment specified for the project]
1.
Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation.
2.
General Electric Company.
3.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
B.
Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.
C.
Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4 wire, 60 Hz.
D.
Main-Bus Continuous: <Insert rating> A.
E.
Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current:
switchgear assembly.
F.
Switchgear Fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in
Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each main and
tie circuit breaker.
Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers
and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.
Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
Bus transition sections.
Pull sections.
Hinged front panels for access to accessory and blank compartments.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 13
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
4.
Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments.
connections are not permitted.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
G.
Cable
Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly.
Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus
with pressure-connector terminations for outgoing neutral conductors.
Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for
spare circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers.
Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit
currents.
Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, un-insulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm)
copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.
Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground
bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.
Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flameretardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.
1)
2)
5.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum.
Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be
removed and reinstalled.
Circuit-Breaker Terminals for Cable Connections: Silver-plated copper bus extensions
equipped with pressure connectors for conductors.
Circuit Breakers: Comply with IEEE C37.13 and UL 1066.
1.
2.
Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each
circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.
Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating
mechanism with the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.
Stored-Energy Mechanism: Manually charged.
Operation counter.
Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current
transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Eaton Digi-Trip 1150 plus or equal by General Electric or Square D.
Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,
independent of each other in both action and adjustment
Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from
minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.
Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on
circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods.
Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked
"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip
short-time-trip function for switchable I2t operation.
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 14
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
4.
5.
i.
Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three triptime-delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the
following:
1)
Four-wire circuit or system.
2)
Four-wire, double-ended substation.
j.
Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip
device to indicate type of fault.
k.
Maintenance mode switched trip units: The trip unit shall utilize Arc Flash
Reduction Maintenance System to reduce the instantaneous pickup value when
activated. The ARMS shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds with a
minimum of settings from 2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS shall be
enabled by a switch on the trip unit with blue indicator LED. A remote
communication link shall also be provided for enable/disable and confirmation.
Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position,
with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuitbreaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two type "a" and two type "b"
stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in
stationary housing.
Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking
mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and
disconnected positions. Include the following features:
a.
b.
Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position
when it is closed.
Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from
connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment
door closed, unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open
circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the
structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions
includes the following:
1)
2)
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary
disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.
Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact
disengaged.
Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in
disconnected position; arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit
breaker from switchgear.
Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to
secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.
Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.
Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.
Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or
equivalent design and electrical interlocks.
Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and
hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.
Undervoltage Trip Devices: Where indicated, adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.
Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 15
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
14.
15.
16.
17.
H.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie
circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.
Lugs: Mechanical style, rated for Copper conductors only, suitable for number, size, and
trip ratings.
Grounding Ball Studs: provide on incoming lug pad and outgoing lug pad.
Provide shorting blocks for maintenance.
Accessories: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear
tests, inspections, maintenance, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected
positions.
Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without
removal from switchgear.
Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class
relays.
I.
Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage
arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.
J.
Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified and compartmented steel box or cabinet with lockable door.
K.
Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of
maintenance manual.
L.
Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports,
necessary appurtenances, and bus connections to accept Circuit Breaker without field changes.
2.4
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.
B.
Connect remote monitoring communication modules to Cleveland Clinic’s data network
through appropriate network interface unit.
C.
The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the
switchgear, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily
accessible terminal blocks.
2.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and
lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.
1.
2.
Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to
produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and
connections.
Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 16
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
3.
B.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and
major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
Frame size of each circuit breaker.
Trip rating for each circuit breaker.
Conduit and wire size for each feeder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with applicable portions in NECA 400.
B.
Install switchgear assembly on a concrete base. Anchor according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.2
Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend
base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of
switchgear unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor support.]
Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems" and Division 3 Concrete Sections
[Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements
and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic-restraint requirements.]
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.
C.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide a list of all torqued connections and
values.
D.
Provide all communications wiring between remote monitoring communication modules and
the Cleveland Clinic’s data network. Verify that each circuit breaker’s address for
microprocessor-communication packages corresponds to Division 26 Section “Electrical Power
Monitoring and Control Systems” requirements.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 17
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
3.3
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Diagram and Instructions:
1.
2.
3.4
Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.
a.
Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control
and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.
b.
System Power Riser Diagrams:
components, and major loads.
Depict power sources, feeders, distribution
Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a
copy of maintenance manual.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and
equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.
Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal
by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies
with requirements in other electrical Sections.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and
components.
Report results in writing.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of
the following NETA categories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Switchgear.
Circuit breakers.
Protective relays.
Instrument transformers.
Metering and instrumentation.
Ground-fault systems.
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 18
CLEVELAND CLINIC OFFICE of FACILITIES
MASTER SPECIFICATIONS
g.
h.
2.
D.
3.5
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Battery systems.
Surge arresters.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear line-up. Remove front and rear panels
so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Section 260573
"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic’s maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.
END OF SECTION 262313
PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262313 - 19
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.3
Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
Surge suppression devices.
Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
Instrumentation.
Control power.
Accessory components and features.
Identification.
Mimic bus.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing
communication and metering.
2.
Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and
communication equipment located in the switchgear.
3.
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS]
A.
REQUIREMENTS
[WHERE
REQUIRED
BY
PROJECT
[Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."]
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge suppression
device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
accessories, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
1.5
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Detailed short-circuits current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation
and isolation.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.
Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified material and finish, for color
selection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
[Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.]
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include
selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,
but no fewer than two of each size and type.
Indicating Lights: One of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by
UL and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Use of series rated equipment is prohibited.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 2.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
G.
Comply with UL 891.
H.
Comply with FM Global requirements.
I.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.9
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards.
C.
Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures
to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
C.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.11
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
1.12
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Main Devices: [Draw-out] [Fixed, individually mounted].
Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
Sections front and rear aligned.
Front- and Rear-Accessible Switchboards:
1.
2.
3.
Main Devices: [Drawout] [Fixed, individually mounted].
Branch Devices: Panel and fixed, individually mounted.
Sections front and rear aligned.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
D.
Nominal System Voltage: [480Y/277 V] [208Y/120 V].
E.
Main-Bus Continuous: <Insert ampere rating> A. [2500 A maximum]
F.
Factory certified 30 cycle rating.
G.
[Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems."]
H.
Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
I.
Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish
over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
J.
Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
K.
Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder
sections.
L.
[Customer Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and
section with front hinged door, for indicated metering, and current transformers for each
meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type
terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with
disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.]
M.
Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
N.
Rear Accessible Switchboards: Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers:
Secured by captive thumb-screws, for access to rear interior of switchboard.
O.
Hinged Front Panels:
compartments.
P.
Buses and Connections: Three-phase, four-wire unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silverplated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as
through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuitbreaker position.
Ground Bus:
1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) hard-drawn copper of 98 percent
conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground
conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway
ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.
Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
5.
6.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.
Q.
Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
R.
[Optional] Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual
bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of
105 deg C.
S.
Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other
components including instruments and instrument transformers.[FOR TROPICAL
LOCATIONS ONLY]
2.2
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES
A.
Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant externally mounted, UL 1449
3rd edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit
rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1.
2.
2.3
Comply with Division 26 Section “Surge Protective Devices”.
Provide a dedicated three pole circuit breaker for the SPD in the switchboard.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
General Electric Company.
Square D (Schneider).
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Up To 1600 A: Comply with UL 489, 100% rated to
meet available fault currents. Use of series rated equipment is prohibited.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Less Than 225 A: Inverse time-current element for
low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
Electronic trip circuit breakers, 225 A and larger shall have RMS sensing; fieldreplaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following fieldadjustable settings:
a.
Instantaneous trip.
b.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Options:
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style, dual rated CU/AL, suitable for number, size, and trip
ratings.
[EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function.
Communication Capability: Communication modules with functions and features
compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26
Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent
of rated voltage. Provide for source breakers for Closed Transition Transfer
Switches.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without
intentional time delay.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS – MAIN DEVICES OVER 1600A
A.
Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13 AND UL 1066.
1.
B.
Ratings: As indicated, fully rated, for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings
for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.
1.
C.
Minimum frame size shall be 1600 A.
Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating
mechanism with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Eaton “Magnum DS” or equal by General Electric or Square D, draw out type power
circuit breaker.
Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.
Stored-Energy Mechanism: [Manually charged] [Electrically charged, with optional
manual charging (FOR ‘Main-Tie-Main’ ARRANGEMENTS)].
Operation counter.
Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current
transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:
1.
2.
Eaton Digi-Trip 1150 plus or equal by General Electric or Square D.
Functions:
Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,
independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to
plus 40 deg C.
Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics.
Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit
breakers, or a combination of these methods.
Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked
"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip shorttime-trip function for switchable I2t operation.
Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.
Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-timedelay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following:
a.
b.
c.
Three-wire circuit or system.
Four-wire circuit or system.
Four-wire, double-ended substation.
10.
Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to
indicate type of fault.
11.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking phase and
ground-fault protection function.
12.
Maintenance mode switched trip units: The trip unit shall utilize Arc Flash Reduction
Maintenance System to reduce the instantaneous pickup value when activated. The
ARMS shall provide a clearing time of 0.04 seconds with a minimum of settings from
2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. The ARMS shall be enabled by a switch on the trip unit
with blue indicator LED. A remote communication link shall also be provided for
enable/disable and confirmation.
E.
Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare
auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation,
quantity as indicated. Each consists of two-type "a" and two-type "b" stages (contacts) wired
through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.
F.
Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to
position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions.
Include the following features:
1.
2.
Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is
closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or
disconnected position.
Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from
connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door
closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker
may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door
open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:
a.
SWITCHBOARDS
Test Position:
Primary disconnecting devices disengaged, and secondary
disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.
262413 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
Disconnected Position:
disengaged.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Primary and secondary devices and ground contact
G.
Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected
position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from
switchgear.
H.
Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure
its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism. Provisions shall be included for
padlocking the breaker in the open or closed position.
I.
Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.
J.
Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.
K.
Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or equivalent
design and electrical interlocks.
L.
Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and hardware
are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.
M.
Undervoltage Trip Devices: Where indicated, adjustable time-delay and pickup voltage.
N.
Shunt-Trip Devices: Where indicated.
O.
Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie circuit
breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.
P.
Lugs: Mechanical style, rated for Copper conductors only, suitable for number, size, and trip
ratings.
Q.
Grounding Ball Studs: provide on incoming lug pad and outgoing lug pad.
R.
Provide shorting blocks for maintenance.
2.5
INSTRUMENTATION
A.
Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, disconnecting type with integral
fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and
relay devices.
Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 Amp, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting
device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay
devices.
Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units
larger than 3 kVA.
Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary
wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault
protection.
B.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor:
systems and with the following features:
1.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy
tolerances as indicated:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
2.6
Microprocessor-based unit suitable for four-wire
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated
values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.
Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from
five to 60 minutes.
Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.
Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Coordinate remote monitoring communication module package with power monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of monitoring data.
B.
Connect remote monitoring communication modules to Cleveland Clinic’s data network
through appropriate network interface unit to the Building Automation System.
C.
The manufacturer shall wire between all communications capable devices within the
switchboard, including electronic meters with the same protocol and wire to a set of easily
accessible terminal blocks.
2.7
CONTROL POWER
A.
Control Circuits: 120-VAC, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from controlpower transformer.
B.
Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection
of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
2.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide
flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
C.
Portable Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Floor-supported, roller-based, elevating carriage
arranged for movement of circuit breakers in and out of compartments for present and future
circuit breakers.
2.9
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Mimic Bus: Entire single-line switchboard bus work, as depicted on factory record drawing, on
an engraved laminated-plastic nameplate.
B.
Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied.
Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.
C.
Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with background color to represent
bus and components complete with lettered designations.
D.
Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment where required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal
thickness. Extend base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum
dimensions of switchboards unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor
support.] Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems” and Division 03 Concrete Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor on 18-inch (450-mm)
centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor, install to elevations required for proper
attachment to switchboards
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D.
[Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]
E.
Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic.
Mount on front of switchboards.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
G.
Install overcurrent
instrumentation.
H.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.
I.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
protective
devices,
transient
voltage
suppression
devices,
and
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 13
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
3.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove
front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Instruments and Equipment:
1)
4.
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties.
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Replace damaged and
D.
Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection report, including a certified report that identifies switchboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 14
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic’s maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices,
instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip,
monitoring, and communication units.
END OF SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 15
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Distribution panelboards.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
Electronic-grade panelboards.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing
communication and metering.
2.
Division 26 Section "Surge Protective Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Circuits" for transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and
communication equipment located in the switchgear.
3.
Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B.
SPD: Surge Protective Device.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.
1.5
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event]."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, surge
suppression device, accessory, and component indicated.
Include dimensions and
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and
finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.6
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
[DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification
that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.7
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.]
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Panelboard Schedules:
balancing.
For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
1.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.9
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
F.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.11
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
B.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service:
[DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.12
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus
104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
2.
C.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
1.13
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
[DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems."]
B.
Enclosures: Flush and surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Kitchen, Food Service and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless
steel.
d.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
e.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
Full Piano Hinge - Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim continuous piano hinged to box
and with standard continuous piano hinged door within piano hinged trim cover.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
Finishes:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after
cleaning and pre-treating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish
consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
Fungus Proofing: [FOR TROPICAL LOCATIONS] Permanent fungicidal
treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover.
C.
Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom.
D.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated
from box.
Fully rated Neutral bus.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Sub-feed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus.
F.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load
centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
H.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
2.2
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1.
For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D.
Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs as shown on One Line Diagram.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2.3
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:
disturbing adjacent units.
D.
Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller,
with same short-circuits interrupting rating as panelboard.
1.
E.
2.4
Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and
secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.
Doors: Full Piano Hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for
compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
D.
Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
F.
Buses:
1.
2.
G.
2.5
Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.
Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.
Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41-compliant, externally mounted, complying with
UL 1449, 3rd edition and Specification 264313.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes up to 250 A.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger; and the
following field-adjustable settings:
a.
Instantaneous trip.
b.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole
configurations with Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have common trip, use of handle ties is not permitted.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application. (e.g. HACR, SWD)
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
[EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]
a.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
b.
Communication Capability: Communication module with functions and features
compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26
Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
c.
Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit.
d.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with fieldadjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.
e.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuitbreaker contacts.
f.
Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit
breaker trips.
g.
Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
h.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.
i.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handles
in on or off position.
j.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handles in on
position.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A.
2.7
Subject to compliance with requirements, Surge Protection Devices shall be IEEE C62.41compliant, externally mounted, and complying with UL 1449, 3rd edition and Specification
264313.
RETRO-FIT PANELBOARD KITS
A.
The panelboard kit shall be specifically designed for retrofit applications in existing panelboard
boxes. Trims for retrofit panelboards shall be designed specifically for retrofit applications.
Trim mounting shall not be dependent nor attached to the existing enclosure. The trim and door
shall attach directly to the panelboard dead-front assembly so that no external trim-fastening
hardware shall be required. Panelboards shall be fully rated.
B.
Interiors shall have field adjustable height and depth.
C.
Factory installed neutral and ground bars, field bondable for Service Entrance applications.
D.
Bolt-on type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of
the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit.
E.
Existing enclosures shall be identified for retrofit suitability in advance. The structural integrity
of all existing enclosures shall be verified. Any enclosure that is damaged shall be replaced with
a new enclosure and panelboard.
2.8
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
D.
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Wall Mounted Panelboards: Do not attach directly to walls or structural surfaces. Attach
panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard on channels such
as “Unistrut”.
C.
Floor Mounted Panelboards: Install panelboards on 4 inch high concrete bases. Comply with
requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Sections.
1.
For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
2.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
D.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
E.
[DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED] [Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements
specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]
F.
Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
H.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
I.
Provide GFI circuit breakers with 30 mA sensitivity trip for all freeze protection, temperature
maintenance, and heat tracing circuits.
J.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
K.
Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency
lights, energy management, and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels.
L.
Stub six 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
M.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
N.
Comply with NECA 1.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
O.
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
New circuit breakers installed in existing panelboards shall be of standard manufacture, shall
match existing, and shall have an interrupting rating of not less than the lowest rated circuit
breaker in the panelboard.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;
incorporate Cleveland Clinic's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use
a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Comply with NETS.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front so joints and connections
are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
2.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards
checked and that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.
D.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
E.
3.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Vacuum dirt and debris from panelboard tubs; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
C.
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is
not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262417 ROLL - UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes Roll-Up Generator Termination Cabinets (RUGTC) for use with AC circuits
rated 600 V and less and having termination/lug landings for phase, neutral, and ground
conductors for transitioning between portable load bank or portable generator and the building.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
RUGTC: Roll Up Generator Termination Cabinet.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For termination cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each unit. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and
conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment.
1.
Connection Wiring Diagrams.
2.
Nameplate legends.
3.
Bus capacities.
4.
Features, characteristics, ratings of each installed unit.
5.
Sample of proposed instructional signage.
C.
Product certificates.
D.
Operation and maintenance data.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain termination cabinet of a single type from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by UL and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
262419 Page - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
D.
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic’s written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
2.
Berthold Electric Company.
B.
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
C.
General Requirements:
equipment”.
2.2
UL 1773 listed, marked “Suitable for use on line side of service
FUNCTIONAL FEATURES
A.
2.3
Description: An arrangement of buswork mounted on insulators in a weatherproof,
permanently mounted cabinet with terminations for the temporary connection of a portable
generator or portable load bank on the line side and permanent connections on the load side to
the facility switchgear.
LINE (TEMPORARY)TERMINATIONS
A.
Incoming Mains Access Location: Front.
ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
262419 Page - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
2.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Main Lugs, Incoming: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical set screw type, CU only.
LOAD (PERMANENT)TERMINATIONS
A.
Outgoing Mains Access Location: Bottom.
B.
Main Lugs, outgoing: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.5
Main and Neutral Lugs: Two-hole, long barrel compression type, CU only.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosures: Freestanding steel or aluminum cabinet unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250,
Type 3R unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location. Enclosure shall maintain NEMA 3R rating with temporary cables installed.
B.
Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied polyester powder coat finish in manufacturer's standard
ANSI 62 gray over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
C.
Compartments: Access to the wiring compartment is through a full front, sturdy, continuous
hinged door with padlock provisions.
D.
Wiring Spaces:
1.
2.
2.6
Access to the line side terminations is through a hinged door in the front of the enclosure.
Front door must be opened. Access panel shall have up to 10 – 3” bushed openings with
safety caps.
The load side access is through a fixed bottom plate for terminating outgoing conduits.
CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS
A.
Nominal System Voltage: [480/277] [208/120] V, three phase, four wire.
B.
Assembly Short-Circuit Current Rating: minimum 35,000 kA.
C.
Continuous Rating: [800] [1200] [1600] [2000] [2500] A.
D.
Phase and Neutral Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable length.
E.
Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated,
1000A/sq.in. current density mounted on insulators.
F.
Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses, equipped with compression
connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables and mechanical connectors for incoming circuit
neutral cables.
ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
262419 Page - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
G.
Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical
connectors for equipment grounding conductors.
H.
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible.
2.7
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Inspect and test according to requirements in NEMA standard.
B.
RUGTC will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports, submit to Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install RUGTC on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in
Division 03 Sections.
1.
The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches (100-mm) above the finished
grade. Edges shall be chamfered.
2.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that anchor into structural
concrete pad.
3.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
5.
Provide concrete filled bollards for protection from vehicular traffic, painted safety
yellow, minimum two.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for
identification of components and wiring.
1.
2.
3.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label with engraved nameplate.
Label with instructional sign.
ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
262419 Page - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between terminal busses and switchgear.
Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
3.4
Comply with requirements in
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Division 26 Section "Raceway and
Boxes for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and
specialties.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
C.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.
Test insulation resistance for each connecting supply circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
END OF SECTION 262419
ROLL UP GENERATOR TERMINATION CABINET
262419 Page - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262419 - MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers" for full voltage motor controller requirements.
C.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing communication
and metering requirements.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes MCC’s for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following
factory-installed components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Incoming main lugs and OCPD’s.
Full-voltage magnetic controllers.
Reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.
Multispeed controllers.
Feeder-tap units.
Instrumentation.
Auxiliary devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CPT: Control power transformer.
B.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
C.
MCC: Motor-control center.
D.
MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
E.
NC: Normally closed.
F.
NO: Normally open.
G.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.4
PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS]
A.
REQUIREMENTS
[WHERE
REQUIRED
BY
PROJECT
[Seismic Performance: MCCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
1.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit
will be fully operational after the seismic event."]
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of controller and each type of MCC.
B.
LEED Submittals:
C.
1.
Product Data for Credit EA 5:
consumption.
2.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
metering requirements.
Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In
addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and
sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including
required clearances and service space around equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
For continuous metering equipment for energy
Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for
each installed controller.
Nameplate legends.
Vertical and horizontal bus capacities.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances, and required area above and around MCC’s where pipe and ducts are
prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on
each support. Indicate field measurements.
B.
[Seismic Qualification Certificates: For MCC’s, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]
C.
Product certificates.
D.
Source quality-control reports.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
E.
1.7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Operation and maintenance data.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Products Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for motor
control centers including clearances between MCC’s and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain MCC’s and controllers of a single type from single source from
single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by UL and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
E.
[IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems."] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]
1.10
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sensor-communication module package with data network and with monitoring
equipment specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for
successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in this Section.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group, Model Freedom 2100.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
B.
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
General Electric Company; 8000 Series.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric, Model 6.
General Requirements for MCC’s: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845.
FUNCTIONAL FEATURES
A.
Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap
units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of
MCC.
B.
Controller Units: Combination controller units.
1.
2.
Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that
automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into
their normal, energized positions.
Equip units in Type B with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections.
C.
Feeder-Tap Units: Through 225-A rating shall have drawout mountings with connectors that
automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their
normal, energized positions.
D.
Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for
insertion of drawout units.
E.
Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare."
2.3
INCOMING MAINS
A.
Incoming Mains Location: [Top] [bottom].
B.
Main Lugs Only: Conductor connectors suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.
C.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
[Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.]
MCCB Features and Accessories:
a.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application.
[Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with
adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and groundfault indicator.]
[Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75
percent of rated voltage.]
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
COMBINATION CONTROLLERS
A.
Full-Voltage Controllers:
1.
B.
General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers:
Section 262913.
General Requirements for Multispeed Magnetic Controllers:
262913.
Comply with Section
Disconnecting Means and OCPD’s:
1.
Fusible Disconnecting Means:
a.
2.
Comply with Section 262913.
MCCB Disconnecting Means:
a.
E.
Comply with
Multispeed Magnetic Controllers:
1.
D.
Comply with Section
Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers:
1.
C.
General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers:
262913.
Comply with Section 262913.
Control Power:
1.
Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary
fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located
pilot, indicating, and control devices.
a.
CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
FEEDER-TAP UNITS
A.
MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1.
2.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A up to 400 A.
Electronic trip circuit breakers, 400 A and larger, with rms sensing; field-replaceable
rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
MCCB Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.6
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
[Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response].
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent
of rated voltage.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker
contacts.
INSTRUMENTATION (OPTIONAL, edit per project requirements)
A.
[Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for threeor four-wire systems and with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondary’s, and potential
terminals rated to 600 V.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum
accuracy tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Three-Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent.
Three-Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent.
Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours:
Plus or minus 2 percent;
accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours.]
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
4.
[Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument
compartment door.]
5.
[Provide metering module on individual motor starter or feeder compartments
indicated on Drawings.]
ENCLOSURES
A.
Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless
otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B.
Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's ANSI 61 grey finish over a rustinhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
C.
Compartments: Modular; individual doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw
fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be
opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device.
D.
Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening
adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in
MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units,
such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or
welding.
E.
Wiring Spaces:
1.
2.
2.8
Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment;
supports to hold wiring in place.
Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring
between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place.
AUXILIARY DEVICES
A.
General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with Section 262913.
B.
Communications Modules: Where indicated provide communication modules, energy metering
and control in motor starters with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and
control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Communications link shall be via Cleveland Clinic’s energy management software.
C.
Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed
outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
D.
Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the load side of overload relays.
E.
Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with Section 262813 “Fuses”.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.9
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS
A.
Wiring: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type B.
B.
Control and Load Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included.
Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
C.
Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V, three phase, four wire.
D.
Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated.
E.
Short-Circuit Current Rating of MCC: Fully rated.
F.
Environmental Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and not exceeding
104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a
24-hour period.
Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (non-condensing).
Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m), or 3300 feet (1000 m) if MCC
includes solid-state devices.
G.
Main-Bus Continuous Rating: <Insert value> A.
H.
Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit
current rating.
I.
Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's
main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.
J.
Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of
vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units.
K.
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver plated.
L.
Neutral Buses: 50 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped
with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.
M.
Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, ¼ inch by 1 inch, extending the
length of the assembly, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit
equipment grounding conductors. The ground bus shall be located in the bottom horizontal
wireway.
N.
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCC’s:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Main Devices: Drawout mounted.
Controller Units: Drawout mounted.
Feeder-Tap Units: Drawout mounted.
Sections front and rear aligned.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
O.
Pull Box on Top of MCC [WHERE REQUIRED]:
1.
2.
3.
4.
P.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as MCC.
Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism.
Removable covers forming top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear easily removable for
drilling and cutting.
Cable supports arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables, including
those for future installation.
Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install MCC’s on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete
base.
1.
Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend
base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of
motor control centers unless otherwise indicated [or unless required for seismic anchor
support.] Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section “Hangers and
Supports for Electrical Systems.”
B.
[Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."] [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS
DELETED]
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D.
Install fuses in each fusible switch.
E.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed.
Section 262813 "Fuses."
F.
Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load
amperes after motors have been installed.
G.
Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the load side of overload relays. Adjust
overload heater sizes to accommodate the reduced motor full-load currents.
H.
Comply with NECA 1.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
Comply with requirements in
262419 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for
identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate.
Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between enclosed controllers, remote devices, and facility's central-control
system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power
Cables."
1.
Install all low voltage wiring (CAT. 6, twisted pair, etc.) between energy metering
devices and Cleveland Clinic’s network.
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.
1.
2.
3.4
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.
Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and
automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure
cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems."
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C.
Verify tightness and torque all accessible bolted electrical connections to manufacturer’s
specified values using a calibrated torque wrench.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections. Inspect and test MCC’s according to requirements in
NEMA ICS 18.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test
and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 10
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting
motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated
voltages.
Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform infrared scan of each MCC. Remove front and rear panels so joints and
connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1.
Instrument: Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
2.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies MCC checked and
that describes infrared-scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial actions taken, and observations after remedial action.
D.
Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed
controllers. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations
after remedial action.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
B.
Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to
the load side of the overload relays.
C.
Adjust the trip settings of thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip
elements. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start
without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for
NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required).
D.
Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences
in reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers.
E.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Cleveland Clinic's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed
controllers.
END OF SECTION 262419
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262419 - 12
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262500 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Feeder-bus assemblies.
Plug-in bus assemblies.
Bus plug-in devices.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For each type of bus assembly [and plug-in device].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Show fabrication and installation details for enclosed bus assemblies. Include plans,
elevations, and sections of components. Designate components and accessories,
including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, connectors, straight lengths, and fittings.
Show fittings, materials, fabrication, and installation methods for listed fire-stop barriers.
Indicate required clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each
field connection.
Detail connections to switchgear, switchboards, and transformers.
Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
Seismic-Restraint Details: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS]
Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
a.
b.
1.4
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to
supported equipment.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled bus-assembly
layouts and relationships between components and adjacent structural, mechanical, and
electrical elements. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vertical and horizontal enclosed bus-assembly runs, offsets, and transitions.
Clearances for access above and to the side of enclosed bus assemblies.
Vertical elevation of enclosed bus assemblies above the floor or bottom of structure.
Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
B.
Location of adjacent construction elements including light fixtures, HVAC and plumbing
equipment, fire sprinklers and piping, signal and control devices, and other equipment.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of enclosed bus assembly, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT
CONDITIONS] Submit certification that enclosed bus assemblies, [plug-in devices],
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the
unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
3.
E.
1.5
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed bus assemblies to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
[Plug-in Units: provide one (1) for each size installed, boxed and labeled.]
2.
One set of joint covers for each busway, boxed and labeled.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed bus assemblies and plug-in devices through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NEC 368
and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with UL 857.
D.
Comply with NEMA BU 1, "Busways."
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
F.
1.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Deliver, store, and handle enclosed bus assemblies according to NEMA BU 1.1, "General
Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600
Volts or Less."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
Derate enclosed bus assemblies for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for
ambient temperature not exceeding 122 deg F (50 deg C) <Insert ambient temperature>.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed bus assemblies and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or floors or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete curbs around openings for vertical bus. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
2.
General Electric Company; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
3.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
B.
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of products that do not
meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved
from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
2.2
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
A.
Feeder-Bus Assemblies: NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies in non-ventilated
housing; single-bolt joints; ratings as indicated.
1.
2.
Seismic Fabrication Requirements: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT
CONDITIONS] Fabricate mounting provisions and attachments for feeder-bus
assemblies with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" when
mounting provisions and attachments are anchored to building structure
Voltage: [120/208] [277/480] V; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.
4.
5.
Enclosure: Aluminum with finish of ANSI 61 epoxy powder paint.
7.
Joints shall be designed such that access is required to only one side of the busway for
tightening joint bolts. It shall be possible to remove any joint and busway section without
disturbing adjacent busway lengths.
Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.
Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.
Plug-in Bus Assemblies [delete if not required]: NEMA BU 1, low-impedance bus assemblies
in non-ventilated housing; single-bolt joints; ratings as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Seismic Fabrication Requirements: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT
CONDITIONS] Fabricate mounting provisions and attachments for switchboards with
reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" when mounting provisions and
attachments are anchored to building structure.
Voltage: [120/208] [277/480] V; 3 phase; 100 percent neutral capacity.
Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated
current.
Bus Materials: High strength, 98% conductivity copper conductors fully insulated with
Class B 130C insulation except at stabs and joints; plated surface at stabs and joints.
Ground:
a.
50 percent capacity internal bus bar of material matching bus material.
6.
Enclosure: Aluminum, with plug-in openings provided on both sides of the busway
sections on 24-inch centers, hinged covers over unused openings. The design shall allow
for ten (10) hinged cover outlets per ten (10) feet of plug-in length. Enclosure finish shall
be ANSI 61 epoxy powder paint.
7.
Joints shall be designed such that access is required to only one side of the busway for
tightening joint bolts. It shall be possible to remove any joint and busway section without
disturbing adjacent busway lengths.
Fittings and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard.
Mounting: Arranged flat, edgewise, or vertically without derating.
8.
9.
2.3
Temperature Rise: 55 deg C above 40 deg C ambient maximum for continuous rated
current.
Bus Materials: High strength, 98% conductivity copper conductors fully insulated with
Class B 130C insulation except at joints; plated surface at joints.
Ground:
a.
50 percent capacity internal bus bars of material matching bus material.
6.
8.
9.
B.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PLUG-IN DEVICES [delete if not required]
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; hook stick-operated handle, lockable with two
padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position, with interrupting capacity to comply
with available fault currents
B.
Accessories: Adjustable hook stick operator.
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Support bus assemblies independent of supports for other elements such as equipment
enclosures at connections to switchgear, switchboards, pipes, conduits, ceilings, and ducts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements
and to comply with seismic-restraint details according to Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]
Design each fastener and support to carry 200 lb (90 kg) or 4 times the weight of bus
assembly, whichever is greater.
Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
Support bus assembly with not less than 3/8-inch (10-mm) steel rods. Install side bracing
to prevent swaying or movement of bus assembly. Modify supports after completion to
eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and housings.
Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Division 26 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Install expansion fittings at locations where bus assemblies cross building expansion joints.
Install at other locations so distance between expansion fittings does not exceed manufacturer's
recommended distance between fittings.
C.
Construct rated fire-stop assemblies where bus assemblies penetrate fire-rated elements such as
walls, floors, and ceilings. Seal around penetrations according to Division 07 Firestopping
Section and Cleveland Clinic Fire Protection Group requirements.
D.
Install a concrete curb at least 4 inches (100 mm) high around bus-assembly floor penetrations.
E.
Coordinate bus-assembly terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper phasing,
connection, and closure.
F.
Tighten bus-assembly joints with calibrated torque wrench to the values recommended by the
bus-assembly manufacturer. Re-Tighten joints again after bus assemblies have been energized
for 30 days.
G.
Install bus-assembly, [plug-in units]. [Support connecting conduit independent of plug-in
unit].
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.3
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
B.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
D.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
E.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but prior to beneficial occupancy, perform an
infrared scan of all bus assembly including joints and plug-in units.
1.
2.
F.
3.4
Uses an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Prepare a certified report identifying bus assembly checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.5
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection to ensure that moisture does not enter bus assembly.
END OF SECTION 262500
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262500 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262600 - POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes freestanding, prepackaged, power distribution units for transforming,
conditioning, and distributing electrical power, usually associated with a UPS unit.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Division 26 Section “Static Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)”.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SPD: Surge Protective Device.
B.
UPS: Uninterrupted power supply.
C.
PDU: Power Distribution Unit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For power distribution units. Include system description, ratings, capacities, and
performance characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Detail equipment
assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1.
1.5
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of power distribution unit, signed by product manufacturer.
C.
[ DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED ] [Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification:
Submit certification that power distribution units, accessories, and components will
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation. [select “a” or “b” below]
a.
b.
2.
3.
D.
1.6
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.]
Source quality-control test reports.
1.
E.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
For each factory test of power distribution units.
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power distribution units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency on-site repairs in less than eight hours’ maximum
response time.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain power distribution unit and associated components specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer with responsibility for entire power distribution unit
installation.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Product Selection for Restricted Spaces: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for PDU
including clearances between PDU and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
F.
1.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Store equipment in spaces with environments controlled within manufacturer's ambient
temperature and humidity tolerances for non-operating equipment.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual power distribution unit provided.
Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 03.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of power distribution units with access flooring for proper
support [and seismic restraint of units.]
C.
Coordinate layout and installation of power distribution units with Cleveland Clinic equipment.
1.
2.
3.
1.10
A.
Meet jointly with electronic equipment representatives and Cleveland Clinic ITD
representatives to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements
and installation interfaces.
Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
Adjust arrangements and locations of power distribution units to accommodate and
optimize arrangement and space requirements of equipment.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Units shall be capable of operating continuously in the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
capability.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Storage Temperature Range: Minus 67 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 85 deg C).
Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C).
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 95 percent, non-condensing.
Altitude: Sea level to 3600 feet (1100 m) above sea level.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Description: Integrated and coordinated assembly of power-line-conditioning and distribution
components packaged in a single cabinet or modular assembly of cabinets. Include the
following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Input-power, circuit-breaker section.
[Isolation transformer.]
Surge protection system.
Output panelboard(s).
Alarm, monitoring, and control system.
B.
[ DELETE IF NOT REQUIRED ]Provide units that are constructed to withstand seismic
forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Unit Capacity Rating: Unit shall carry indicated RMS kilovolt-ampere load continuously
without exceeding rated insulation temperature for the following input voltage and load current:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Output kVA: <insert rating> kVA.
Input Voltage: [480] [208] VAC, three phase, 60 Hz.
Output Voltage: [480/277] [208/120] VAC, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz.
INPUT-POWER, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SECTION
A.
2.4
Description: 3-pole, shunt-tripped, thermal-magnetic-type circuit breaker, rated for indicated
interrupting capacity and 125 percent of input current of unit at 100 percent rated load.
ISOLATION TRANSFORMER SECTION [ OPTIONAL ]
A.
Description: Dry-type, electro-statically shielded, three-phase, common-core, convection-aircooled isolation transformer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Comply with UL 1561.
Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel, one leg per phase.
Coil Material and Insulation: Copper windings with a 220 deg C insulation class.
Temperature Rise: Designed for 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient.
Thermal overload protection.
Output Impedance: 3.5 plus or minus 0.5 percent.
Regulation: 2 to 4 percent maximum, at full-resistive load; 5 percent maximum, at rated
nonlinear load.
Taps: 6 full-capacity compensation taps at 2.5 percent increments; 2 above and 4 below
nominal voltage.
Full-Load Efficiency: Minimum 96 percent at rated nonlinear load.
Magnetic-Field Strength External to Transformer Enclosure: Less than 0.1 gauss at 450
mm.
Audible Noise: Comply with NEMA ST 20.
Electrostatic Shielding: Independently shield each winding with a double-copper,
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize inter-winding capacitance.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
13.
2.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Coil leads and terminal trips shall be arranged to minimize capacitive coupling
between input and output connections.
Shield Terminal: Separate, and marked "Shield" for grounding connection.
Capacitance: Limit capacitance between primary and secondary windings to a
maximum of 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: 120 dB minimum, 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minus 65
dB minimum, 1.5 to 100 kHz.
Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minus 52 dB minimum, 1.5 to 10 kHz.
Neutral Rating: 1.732 times the system full-load ampere rating.
SPD SYSTEM
A.
Description: Integrated SPD system complying with Division 26 Section "Surge Protective
Devices for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits," to protect unit panelboard, and having the
following features:
1.
2.
2.6
Disconnect Device: Manual, three-pole, fused disconnect switch to de-energize SPD
system while permitting power distribution units to continue operation. Fuses are rated at
200-kA interrupting capacity.
Nonlinear Loading: System shall accommodate rated-load current with a minimum 3.0
crest factor and 85 percent total harmonic distortion.
OUTPUT PANELBOARDS
A.
Description: Panelboards complying with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" except for
mounting provisions. Mount in front of power distribution units behind flush doors. Include
the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.7
Construction: 42 pole, 208/120 V, 3 phase; capable of accepting branch circuit breakers
rated to 100 A.
Panelboard Rating: 225 A, with main circuit breaker.
Panelboard Phase, Neutral and Ground Buses: Copper, with neutral bus at least 1.732
times the nominal phase bus rating.
Isolated Ground Bus: Copper, adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from supports.
Branch Circuit Breakers: Bolt on.
Cable Racks: Removable and arranged for supporting and routing cables for panelboard
entrance.
Access Panels: Arranged so additional branch-circuit wiring can be installed and
connected in the future.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT CONTROLS
A.
Include the following control features:
1.
Emergency Power Off: local EPO shall include a fully guarded and illuminated
“Emergency Power Off” pushbutton. Pressing the EPO switch shall immediately shut
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
down the unit by activating the shunt trip of the main input circuit breaker. As part of the
EPO circuit, an interface shall also be provided for connecting one or more normally
open or normally closed remote EPO switches to the EPO circuit. For flexibility in
meeting shutdown control schemes, the local EPO (unit shutdown) circuit shall be
isolated from the remote EPO (room shutdown) circuit. The remote EPO circuit shall be
designed to allow direct connection of multiple units with single and multiple shutdown
control contacts.
Over-under alarm shutdown with automatic unit disconnection for the following alarm
conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
2.8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
High temperature.
High and low input or output voltage.
Phase loss.
Ground fault.
Reverse phase rotation.
Ground-fault protection with automatic system shutdown.
Alarm Contacts: Electrically isolated, Form C (one normally open and one normally
closed), summary alarm; contact set shall change state if any monitored function goes
into alarm mode.
MONITORING, STATUS, AND ALARM ANNUNCIATION
A.
Description: the PDU shall be equipped with a microprocessor-based power monitor panel. The
monitor panel shall gather and process information from electrical and environmental sensors,
relays and switches both internal and external to the unit. The monitored parameters and alarms
shall be displayed on the unit monitor panel and shall also be available for communication to a
Liebert centralized monitoring system using a two-wire, twisted-pair, low-voltage signal circuit
having an RS-422 format for reliable communication up to 1000 meters. Additionally, the
monitor panel shall be equipped with an RS-232 service port for adjusting parameters and
performing diagnostics and an isolated RS-232 ASCII port for communication to other
monitoring systems:
1.
Power Monitoring:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
Input Voltage: Line to line, rms.
Output Voltage: Line to line, rms.
Output Voltage: Line to neutral, rms.
Output current: All phases.
Output kVA.
Output kW.
Output current THD.
Output PF.
Output frequency.
Output kW hours.
Percent load.
Date/time.
Status Indication: Unit on.
Alarm Annunciation:
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
2.9
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
High temperature.
High and low input voltage.
High and low output voltage.
Phase loss.
Ground fault.
Frequency.
Phase rotation.
SPD module failure.
Audible Alarm and Silencing Switch: Alarm sounds when alarm indication occurs.
Silencing switch shall silence audible alarm but leave visual indication active until failure
or other alarm conditions are corrected.
SOUND LEVEL
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
General: Fully assembled products have a minimum of 3 dB less than the maximum sound
levels prescribed for transformers of corresponding ratings when factory tested according to
IEEE C57.12.91.
FINISHES
Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment.
IEEE C57.12.91 and NEMA ST 20.
Comply with
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Arrange power distribution units to provide adequate access to equipment and circulation of
cooling air.
B.
Anchor or restrain floor-mounting power distribution units according to manufacturer's written
instructions, [seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."]
C.
Identify equipment and install warning signs according to Division 26 Section "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
3.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
1.
B.
3.3
Separately Derived Systems: Make grounding connections to grounding electrodes as
indicated; comply with NFPA 70.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification for circuit breakers, molded case; and for transformers,
dry type, air cooled, low voltage, small. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Perform functional tests of power distribution units throughout their operating ranges.
Test each monitoring, status, and alarm function.
C.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
D.
Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed
"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Verify that power distribution units are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and with
written installation requirements in Division 26 Sections.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 8
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
3.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Adjust power distribution units to provide optimum voltage to equipment served throughout
normal operating cycle of loads served. Record input and output voltages and adjustment
settings, and incorporate into test results.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Cleveland Clinic personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain power distribution units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration
and Training."
END OF SECTION 262600
POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS
262600 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes equipment for electricity metering by Utility Company.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment.
1.
2.
1.4
Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring
designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by UL and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Cleveland Clinic or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements
indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Cleveland Clinic's written
permission.
ELECTRICITY METERING
262713 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.6
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
COORDINATION
A.
Electrical Service Connections:
furnish as follows:
1.
2.
Coordinate with Utility Companies and components they
Comply with requirements of Utilities providing electrical power services.
Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for
electricity-metering components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY
A.
Meters will be furnished by Utility Company.
B.
Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power Utility Company.
C.
Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power Utility Company.
D.
Meter Sockets: Steady-state and short-circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit ratings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.
B.
Install meters furnished by Utility Company. Install raceways and equipment according to
utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend
grounding connections as required by Utility Company.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Comply with Utility Company requirements.
Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass Utility’s tests and
inspections.
END OF SECTION 262713
ELECTRICITY METERING
262713 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
“Lighting Control Devices” for wall box dimmers and wall box occupancy sensors.
C.
Cleveland Clinic ITD Standards for Telecommunications devices.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Twist-locking receptacles.
Isolated-ground receptacles.
Hospital-grade receptacles.
Tamper-resistant receptacles.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
Pendant cord-connector devices.
Cord and plug sets.
Toggle Switches.
Wall switch occupancy sensors.
Floor service outlets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
1.4
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1.
2.
Receptacles for Cleveland Clinic-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.5
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by UL and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with NFPA 99.
D.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
E.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking
wall plates.
C.
[Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.]
1.7
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: UL listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1.
2.
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.2
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Heavy duty specification grade complying with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement SD, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Cooper.
Hubbell.
Pass & Seymour.
Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
E.
Cooper; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex).
Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300 (duplex).
Pass & Seymour; 8301 (single), 8300H (duplex).
Leviton Mfg. Company; 8310 (single), 8300(duplex).
Hospital-Grade for use in MRI rooms, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Designed for use in high magnetic field environments, constructed of non ferrous materials,
nickel–brass mounting strap, brass power contacts, brass screws, single-piece, rivet-less, nickelplated, all-brass grounding system. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 520R, and UL 498 Supplement SD.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
Leviton Mfg. Company; 5891(single), 5352 (duplex).
Cooper; IG5362RN.
Hubbell; IG5362.
Pass & Seymour; IG5362.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 5362IG.
Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the
green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from
mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent
on removable parts.
Isolated-Ground, Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.
Comply with UL 498-Supplement SD.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding
screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting
strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on
removable parts.
Tamper-Resistant, Hospital Grade, Duplex, Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply
with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement SD, and FS W-C596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.3
Cooper; IG8300H.
Hubbell; IG8362.
Pass & Seymour; IG8300.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 8380-IG.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
F.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Cooper; TR8300.
Hubbell; HBL8300SGA.
Pass & Seymour; TR63H.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 8300-SGG.
Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, and
“Pediatric Locations" Section.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Straight blade, non-feed through type.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943, Class A, and FS W-C-596.
Include correct wiring/trip indicator light.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Cooper; VGF20.
Hubbell; GFR5352L.
Pass & Seymour; 2095.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 7590.
Tamper-Resistant GFCI, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
WIRING DEVICES
Hubbell; GFTR20.
Pass & Seymour; 2095TR.
262726 - 4
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
D.
Hospital-Grade, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, UL 498-Supplement SD and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Cooper; VGFH20.
Hubbell; HFR8300HL.
Pass & Seymour; 2095HG.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 7899HG.
RECEPTACLES FOR SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Specialized Receptacles:
configurations and UL 498.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Cooper.
2.
Hubbell.
3.
Pass & Seymour.
2.5
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 for standard
HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES
A.
Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
UL 1010.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
Comply with NEMA FB 11 and
Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.
TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A.
Single Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A for use in Isolated Power System Panels: Hospital Use,
Locking Type.
1.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Hubbell: 23000 HG.
Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6,
Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
WIRING DEVICES
Cooper; CWL520R.
Hubbell; HBL2310.
Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 2310.
262726 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
C.
Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cooper; IGL520R.
Hubbell; IG2310.
Pass & Seymour; IG4700.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 2310-IG.
Description:
a.
b.
2.7
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding
screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting
strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on
removable parts.
PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector.
NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596.
Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external
cable grip.
External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel
wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for
corresponding connector.
CORD AND PLUG SETS
A.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
2.9
Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the
equipment rating.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
TOGGLE SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
a.
Single Pole:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Cooper; AH1224.
Hubbell; HBL1224.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 1224-2.
Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
D.
Cooper; AH1223.
Hubbell; HBL1223.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 1223-2.
Four Way:
1)
2)
3)
4)
C.
Cooper; AH1222.
Hubbell; HBL1222.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 1222-2.
Three Way:
1)
2)
3)
4)
d.
Cooper; AH1221.
Hubbell; HBL1221.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 1221-2.
Two Pole:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.
Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 1221-LH1.
Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."
Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cooper; AH1221L.
Hubbell; HBL1221L.
Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
Leviton Mfg. Company; 1221-2L.
Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. Provide six
(6) spare keys.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 7
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.10
A.
WALL BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS
Line voltage dual technology wall-switch sensors with power pack:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Description: Line Voltage Dual Technology type, 120/230/277 VAC, adjustable time
delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, UL Listed with a minimum PIR
coverage area of 300 sq. ft and a minimum UV coverage area of 225 sq. ft.
Operating Environment: Operating temperature 32-104 degrees F with a relative
humidity (non-condensing) of 0% to 95%.
Finish: White
Warranty: 5 Years
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A.
Watt Stopper (The) DW-100- Dual Technology.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Line voltage dual technology dual relay wall-switch sensors.
1.
2.11
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Watt Stopper (The) DW 200 - Dual Technology dual relay output.
Hubbell.
Leviton.
Description: Line voltage dual technology type, 120/230/277 VAC, adjustable time
delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, UL listed with a minimum PIR
coverage area of 300 sq. ft. and a minimum UV coverage area of 225 sq. ft. Contains two
relays.
Operating Environment: Operating temperature 32-104 degrees F with a relative
humidity (non-condensing) of 0% to 95%.
Two relays.
Dual on/off buttons.
Finish: White
Warranty: 5 Years.
WALL PLATES
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
2.
3.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces:
a.
Offices and administrative areas: Smooth, flexible, thermoplastic nylon.
b.
Clinical, laboratories: patient care areas: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished,
Type 302 stainless steel.
c.
MRI suites: non-magnetic plates and screws.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished, Type 302
stainless steel.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 8
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
4.
5.
B.
2.12
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
Receptacles for use with computers: Use engraved machine printing with 0.188” high
black-filled lettering on face of plate to read “COMPUTER ONLY”.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof-in-use Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R,
weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Coordinate fittings with floor boxes as described in Section 260533.
B.
Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
C.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
D.
Service Plate: Rectangular die-cast aluminum with satin finish.
E.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet:
Standards.
2.13
A.
FINISHES
Device Color:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic ITD Department
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.
UPS: Blue.
Wall Plate Color: For non-metallic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 9
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
C.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
“Daisy-chaining” of receptacles is not permitted.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
F.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pig-tailing existing conductors are permitted, provided the outlet box is large
enough.
Device Installation:
1.
E.
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the left.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 10
FOR:
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
G.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multi-gang wall plates.
H.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped or
engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on black field, self adhesive nameplate
attached to face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
2.
3.
B.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Test straight-blade hospital-grade convenience outlets for the retention force of the grounding
blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).
D.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 11
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches,
enclosed controllers, and motor-control centers.
Spare-fuse cabinets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include
the following for each fuse type indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to
accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,
local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.
Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment
calculations are based.
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following:
1.
FUSES
Ambient temperature adjustment information.
262813 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
4.
1.5
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves
(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than
three (3) of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single
source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by UL and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
E.
Comply with Cleveland Clinic Design Standards.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than [40 deg F (5
deg C)] <Insert temperature> or more than [100 deg F (38 deg C)] <Insert temperature>,
apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size
and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
FUSES
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
262813 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
B.
2.2
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Mersen USA (Ferraz Shawmut)
The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do
not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not
relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety.
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A.
2.3
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent
with circuit voltages.
SPARE-FUSE CABINET
A.
Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and keycoded cam lock and pull.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity
minimum.
Finish: Gray, baked enamel.
Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of
door.
Fuse Pullers: Provide for each size of fuse.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fuses before installation.
damaged.
B.
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
C.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes
and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
D.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to
fuse ratings.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
FUSE APPLICATIONS
A.
FUSES
Provide fuses in accordance with Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device
Coordination Study".
262813 - 3
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
B.
3.3
Cartridge Fuses:
1.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
2.
Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay.
3.
Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
removing fuse.
B.
Install spare-fuse cabinet(s) in electric rooms and mechanical rooms, stock with spares and fuse
pullers.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
FUSES
262813 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Fusible switches.
Non-fusible switches.
Shunt trip switches.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
Molded-case switches.
Enclosures.
Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for interfacing
communication and metering requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: [WHERE REQUIRED BY PROJECT CONDITIONS] Enclosed
switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 1
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
1.5
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data
on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1.
1.6
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of
overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer. [NOT REQUIRED IF PARAGRAPH 1.4 IS DELETED]
1.
2.
3.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.7
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Manufacturer's field service report.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit
breakers.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 2
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
1.8
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.9
Fuses no fewer than three (3) of each size and type.
Fuse Pullers: one for each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from
single manufacturer.
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by UL and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not
exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: [DELETE THIS PARAGRAPH IF NOT
REQUIRED] Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Cleveland Clinic or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Cleveland Clinic no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Cleveland Clinic's written
permission.
Cleveland Clinic Lock-out/Tag-out procedures shall be used with Contractor controlled
locks and tags.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 3
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
5.
1.11
A.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [240] [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed
position.
C.
Accessories: [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.2
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate
before switch blades open.
Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 4
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
2.
3.
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [240] [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories: [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and
bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate
before switch blades open.
Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.
SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES [VERIFY LOCAL CODE REQUIERMENTS]
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
Mersen USA (Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.)
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA
interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.
C.
Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse
block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed
position.
D.
Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and
secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,
connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.
E.
Accessories: [EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.
Oiltight red ON pilot light.
Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.
Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and
closed.
Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 5
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
6.
7.
2.4
ISSUED: 00/00/20XX
Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay;
[120-V ac] [24-V dc] coil
voltage.
Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Eaton Corp. Electrical Group.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
General Requirements:
Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for
circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A up to 400 A.
D.
Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
E.
Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: 400 A and larger. Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing,
with the following field-adjustable settings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
F.
Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations
with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
G.
Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers:
configurations with Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
H.
Features and Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Single- and two-pole
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting
circuits.
[EDIT FOR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS]
Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type
with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay
settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence current transformer/sensor.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 6
PROJECT NAME
CLEVELAND CLINIC JOB #
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
I.
Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features
compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in Division 26 Section
"Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional
time delay.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
Key Inter